oracle process manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · adding and editing status codes ... the principles...

330
Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide Release 11i June 2002 Part No. A92170-03

Upload: others

Post on 12-Jul-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oracle� Process Manufacturing

New Product Development User’s Guide

Release 11i

June 2002

Part No. A92170-03

Page 2: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide, Release 11i

Part No. A92170-03

Copyright © 1996, 2002, Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved.

Primary Author: Richard Persen

Contributing Authors: Eddie Oumerretane, Gina Walsh

Contributors: Sandra Dulyk, Melanie Grosser, Graceann Iannacchino, LeAta Jackson, Milind Kogekar,Pawan Kumar, Sukarna Reddy, Shyamsundar Sitaraman, Bill Stearns, Brenda Stone, Karen Theel,Chandrashekar Tiruvidula, Elaine Wan

The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information ofOracle Corporation; they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use anddisclosure and are also protected by copyright, patent and other intellectual and industrial propertylaws. Reverse engineering, disassembly or decompilation of the Programs, except to the extent requiredto obtain interoperability with other independently created software or as specified by law, is prohibited.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problemsin the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Oracle Corporation does not warrant that thisdocument is error-free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for thesePrograms, no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation.

If the Programs are delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing or using the programs onbehalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:

Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are "commercialcomputer software" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs, including documentation,shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement.Otherwise, Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are "restricted computersoftware" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights (June, 1987). Oracle Corporation, 500Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or other inherentlydangerous applications. It shall be the licensee's responsibility to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup,redundancy, and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used forsuch purposes, and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of thePrograms.

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Other names may be trademarks of theirrespective owners.

Page 3: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Contents

Send Us Your Comments ................................................................................................................... ix

Preface ............................................................................................................................................................ xi

Audience for This Guide...................................................................................................................... xiHow To Use This Guide ....................................................................................................................... xi

Documentation Accessibility ........................................................................................................ xiiiOther Information Sources ................................................................................................................. xiii

Online Documentation................................................................................................................... xiiiRelated User’s Guides................................................................................................................... xivGuides Related to All Products ................................................................................................... xivOracle Process Manufacturing Documentation ........................................................................ xivInstallation and System Administration .................................................................................... xixOther Implementation Documentation....................................................................................... xxTraining and Support................................................................................................................... xxii

Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications Data ............................................ xxiiAbout Oracle........................................................................................................................................ xxiiiYour Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... xxiii

1 Understanding New Product Development

About This Guide ............................................................................................................................... 1-2About New Product Development .................................................................................................. 1-4Tasks and Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 1-5Process Flow............................................................................................................................... .......... 1-7Understanding Navigation ............................................................................................................. 1-10

iii

Page 4: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Workbenches ......................................................................................................... 1-14Understanding the Status Approval Workflow .......................................................................... 1-16Adding and Editing Status Codes ................................................................................................. 1-22

Entering Status Details............................................................................................................... 1-25Finding a Status Code ................................................................................................................ 1-26

Understanding Version Control ..................................................................................................... 1-27

2 Setting Up

Setting Up in Other Applications .................................................................................................... 2-2Setting Up Responsibilities and Menu Access ............................................................................. 2-6Setting Up Formula Classes .............................................................................................................. 2-8Setting Up Operation Classes........................................................................................................... 2-9Setting Up Routing Classes ............................................................................................................ 2-10Setting Up Activities ........................................................................................................................ 2-11Setting Up Laboratories ................................................................................................................... 2-12Setting Up Technical Parameters ................................................................................................... 2-13Setting Up Technical Parameter Sequences................................................................................. 2-19Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses ............................................................................. 2-20

3 Formulas

Understanding Formula Setup ......................................................................................................... 3-3Requirements....................................................................................................................................... 3-4Solutions ............................................................................................................................... ................ 3-6Entering Item Technical Data ........................................................................................................... 3-8Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet ................................................................................................ 3-11

Saving a Spreadsheet.................................................................................................................. 3-13Retrieving a Spreadsheet ........................................................................................................... 3-13Displaying Calculation Errors .................................................................................................. 3-14

Setting Up Formula Information ................................................................................................... 3-16Using Formula Phantoms ................................................................................................................ 3-18Scaling Formulas ............................................................................................................................... 3-20Defining and Maintaining Formulas ............................................................................................ 3-29Finding a Formula............................................................................................................................. 3-33Displaying the Formula Summary ................................................................................................ 3-34Displaying the Formula Header Summary .................................................................................. 3-36

iv

Page 5: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details ................................................................................................................ 3-38Scaling a Formula ....................................................................................................................... 3-47Displaying Ingredient Technical Parameters ......................................................................... 3-48Using the View Menu to Find a Formula................................................................................ 3-48

Displaying the Formula Product Summary ................................................................................. 3-50Displaying the Formula Byproduct Summary ............................................................................ 3-52Displaying the Formula Ingredient Summary............................................................................ 3-53Displaying a Summary of Formula Product Lines..................................................................... 3-55Editing Formula Product Lines ...................................................................................................... 3-57Editing a Formula Product Line ..................................................................................................... 3-60Displaying a Summary of Formula Byproduct Lines ................................................................ 3-62Editing Formula Byproduct Lines ................................................................................................. 3-63Editing a Formula Byproduct Line ................................................................................................ 3-65Displaying a Summary of Formula Ingredient Lines................................................................ 3-67Editing Formula Ingredient Lines ................................................................................................. 3-69Editing a Formula Ingredient Line ................................................................................................ 3-72Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report ......................................................................... 3-74Using Formula Inquiry .................................................................................................................... 3-79Interpreting a Formula Inquiry...................................................................................................... 3-82

Displaying Details from a Formula Inquiry ........................................................................... 3-83Displaying an Intermediate Formula ...................................................................................... 3-85

Analyzing a Formula ........................................................................................................................ 3-87Displaying Formula Analysis Results .......................................................................................... 3-89Finding a Formula Analysis............................................................................................................ 3-95Overriding Default Explosion Rules ............................................................................................ 3-96

4 Operations

Understanding Operations ............................................................................................................... 4-2Requirements....................................................................................................................................... 4-3Solutions............................................................................................................................... ................ 4-4Defining and Maintaining Operations .......................................................................................... 4-5Defining and Maintaining Activities ............................................................................................. 4-7Defining and Maintaining Resources ............................................................................................ 4-8Finding an Operation......................................................................................................................... 4-9Displaying the Operations Summary ........................................................................................... 4-10

v

Page 6: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Operation Header Summary .............................................................................. 4-11Entering Operation Activity Details ............................................................................................. 4-12

Using the View Menu to Find an Operation .......................................................................... 4-15Entering Activity-Resource Details ............................................................................................... 4-17Displaying Operation Activity Line Summary........................................................................... 4-20Displaying the Resource Line Summary...................................................................................... 4-22Editing a Resource Line ................................................................................................................... 4-25

5 Routings

Understanding Routings ................................................................................................................... 5-3Requirements....................................................................................................................................... 5-4Solutions ............................................................................................................................... ................ 5-5Defining and Maintaining Routings .............................................................................................. 5-6Finding a Routing ............................................................................................................................... 5-8Displaying the Routings Summary ................................................................................................. 5-9Displaying the Routing Header Summary .................................................................................. 5-11

Using the View Menu to Find a Routing................................................................................. 5-12Entering Routing Details................................................................................................................. 5-13Displaying the Routing Step Line Summary .............................................................................. 5-17Editing Routing Step Lines ............................................................................................................. 5-18Entering Routing Step Dependencies........................................................................................... 5-19Displaying Theoretical Process Loss............................................................................................. 5-22Editing Theoretical Process Loss ................................................................................................... 5-23Understanding the Routing Designer........................................................................................... 5-24Using the Routing Designer ........................................................................................................... 5-26

Using the Routing Properties Window ................................................................................... 5-28Using the Routing Step Properties Window........................................................................... 5-29Using the Activity Properties Window ................................................................................... 5-31Using the Resource Properties Window ................................................................................. 5-31Using the Routing Step Dependency Properties Window ................................................... 5-33

6 Recipes

Understanding Recipes...................................................................................................................... 6-3Requirements....................................................................................................................................... 6-4Solutions ............................................................................................................................... ................ 6-5

vi

Page 7: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Recipes................................................................................................. 6-7Finding a Recipe ................................................................................................................................. 6-9Displaying the Recipes Summary ................................................................................................. 6-10Displaying the Recipe Header Summary..................................................................................... 6-11Understanding Step Quantity Calculations ................................................................................ 6-13Entering Recipe Details ................................................................................................................... 6-15

Using the View Menu to Find a Recipe................................................................................... 6-20Entering Recipe Organization Details.......................................................................................... 6-22

Using the Find Recipe Organization Details Window.......................................................... 6-25Entering Multi-Record Recipe Validity Rules ............................................................................ 6-26Editing Recipe Validity Rules ........................................................................................................ 6-28Displaying Validity Rules By Product.......................................................................................... 6-30Displaying Validity Rules By Recipe ........................................................................................... 6-32Displaying the Recipe Step/Material Association ..................................................................... 6-34Understanding the Recipe Designer ............................................................................................. 6-36Using the Recipe Designer.............................................................................................................. 6-40

Using the Material View Windows.......................................................................................... 6-42Using the Formula Item Pane ................................................................................................... 6-45Using the Recipe Properties Window...................................................................................... 6-48Using the Process Instruction Sheet......................................................................................... 6-49

7 Tools

Understanding Search and Replace ................................................................................................ 7-2Requirements....................................................................................................................................... 7-6Solutions............................................................................................................................... ................ 7-7Performing a Search and Replace .................................................................................................... 7-8

Using the Replace Results Window......................................................................................... 7-10Using the Graphical Process Navigator........................................................................................ 7-12

vii

Page 8: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

A New Product Development Navigator Paths

B New Product Development Profile Options

C New Product Development Status Codes

Glossary

Index

viii

Page 9: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Send Us Your Comments

Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide, Release 11 i

Part No. A92170-03

Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of thispublication. Your input is an important part of the information used for revision.

� Did you find any errors?� Is the information clearly presented?� Do you need more information? If so, where?� Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples?� What features did you like most about this manual?

If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, please indicate the chapter,section, and page number (if available). You can send comments to us in the following ways:

� FAX: 650-506-7200 Attn: Oracle Process Manufacturing� Postal service:

Oracle CorporationOracle Process Manufacturing500 Oracle ParkwayRedwood City, CA 94065U.S.A.

� Electronic mail message to [email protected] you would like a reply, please give your name, address, and telephone number below.

If you have problems with the software, please contact your local Oracle Support Services.

ix

Page 10: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

x

Page 11: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Preface

Audience for This GuideWelcome to Release 11i of the Oracle Process Manufacturing New ProductDevelopment User’s Guide.

This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of the following:

� The principles and customary practices of your business area.

� Oracle Process Manufacturing

If you have never used Oracle Process Manufacturing, Oracle suggests youattend one or more of the Oracle Process Manufacturing training classesavailable through Oracle University.

� The Oracle Applications graphical user interface.

To learn more about the Oracle Applications graphical user interface, read theOracle Applications User’s Guide.

See Other Information Sources for more information about Oracle Applicationsproduct information.

How To Use This GuideThis guide contains the information you need to understand and use New ProductDevelopment.

� Chapter 1, Understanding New Product Development, describes thefundamentals of New Product Development. It presents the basic processesrequired to develop a new product, and it introduces a basic understanding ofnavigation, workbenches, the status approval workflow, adding and editingstatus codes, and version control.

� Chapter 2, Setting Up, describes setup requirements in other applications. Itpresents the setup of responsibilities and menu access, and optional setup offormula classes, operation classes, and routing classes. The chapter alsoexplains the setup of activities, laboratories, technical parameters, technicalparameter sequences, technical classes, and technical subclasses.

� Chapter 3, Formulas, includes a basic understanding of formula setup, how toenter item technical data, and how to use the laboratory spreadsheet. It showshow to find a formula. The chapter also presents setting up formula

xi

Page 12: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

information including how to use formula phantoms. Methods available toscale formulas are discussed. In addition to entering formula details, thechapter provides information on how to define and maintain formulas at theheader and line levels, including methods for displaying summaries ofproducts, byproducts, and ingredients. Procedures for running and interpretingthe Indented Bill of Materials Report and formula inquiry are provided. Thecomplete process of analyzing a formula, displaying formula analysis results,and overriding default explosion rules are given.

� Chapter 4, Operations, presents information on how to maintain operations,activities, and resources. It shows how to find an operation. The chapter alsopresents summaries of operations and operation headers to give an overview ofoperations created. The process to enter operation activity details andactivity-resource details is explained with information on how to displayactivity lines and how to edit a summary of resource lines.

� Chapter 5, Routings, presents information on how to define, maintain, and findroutings. It shows how to find a routing. A summary of routings and routingheaders delivers an overview of routings created. The process to enter routingdetails and display the routing step line summary is explained. Procedures toedit routing step lines and to enter routing step dependencies are given. Thechapter also presents information on how to display and edit theoreticalprocess loss, and how to search for and replace routings.

� Chapter 6, Recipes, presents information on how to define and maintainrecipes. It shows how to find a recipe. A summary of recipes and recipe headersdelivers an overview of recipes created. A basic understanding of step quantitycalculations is provided with a procedure to enter recipe details and recipeorganization details. The process to enter and edit validity rules and to interpretrecipe step and material association delivers a basic understanding of recipeuse.

� Chapter 7, Tools, presents information on how to perform a search and replaceof components in operations, routings, formulas, or recipes.

� Appendix A, New Product Development Navigator Paths, describes how tonavigate to each window.

� Appendix B, New Product Development Profile Options, describes profileoptions.

� Appendix C, New Product Development Status Codes, describes status codes.

� A Glossary provides definitions of terms that are used in this guide.

xii

Page 13: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Documentation AccessibilityOur goal is to make Oracle products, services, and supporting documentationaccessible, with good usability, to the disabled community. To that end, ourdocumentation includes features that make information available to users ofassistive technology. This documentation is available in HTML format, and containsmarkup to facilitate access by the disabled community. Standards will continue toevolve over time, and Oracle Corporation is actively engaged with othermarket-leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that ourdocumentation can be accessible to all of our customers. For additional information,visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site athttp://www.oracle.com/accessibility/.

Other Information SourcesYou can choose from many sources of information, including onlinedocumentation, training, and support services, to increase your knowledge andunderstanding of Oracle Process Manufacturing.

If this guide refers you to other Oracle Applications documentation, use only theRelease 11i versions of those guides.

Online DocumentationAll Oracle Applications documentation is available online (HTML or PDF).

� Online Help - The new features section in the HTML help describes newfeatures in 11i. This information is updated for each new release of OracleProcess Manufacturing. The new features section also includes informationabout any features that were not yet available when this guide was printed. Forexample, if your administrator has installed software from a mini-packs anupgrade, this document describes the new features. Online help patches areavailable on MetaLink.

� 11i Features Matrix - This document lists new features available by patch andidentifies any associated new documentation. The new features matrixdocument is available on MetaLink.

� Readme File - Refer to the readme file for patches that you have installed tolearn about new documentation or documentation patches that you candownload.

xiii

Page 14: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Related User’s GuidesOracle Process Manufacturing shares business and setup information with otherOracle Applications products. Therefore, you may want to refer to other user’sguides when you set up and use Oracle Process Manufacturing.

You can read the guides online by choosing Library from the expandable menu onyour HTML help window, by reading from the Oracle Applications DocumentLibrary CD included in your media pack, or by using a Web browser with a URLthat your system administrator provides.

If you require printed guides, you can purchase them from the Oracle Store athttp://oraclestore.oracle.com.

Guides Related to All Products

Oracle Applications User’s GuideThis guide explains how to enter data, query, run reports, and navigate using thegraphical user interface (GUI) available with this release of Oracle ProcessManufacturing (and any other Oracle Applications products). This guide alsoincludes information on setting user profiles, as well as running and reviewingreports and concurrent processes.

You can access this user’s guide online by choosing ”Getting Started with OracleApplications” from any Oracle Applications help file.

Oracle Process Manufacturing Documentation

Accounting Setup User’s GuideThe OPM Accounting Setup application is where users set up global accountingattributes about the way financial data will be collected by OPM. These attributesinclude such things as account keys, financial calendars, and account segments.Since OPM is closely integrated with Oracle General Ledger (GL), much of theattributes are defined in the Oracle GL instead of OPM, and therefore, the windowsare display only within OPM. The Oracle Process Manufacturing Accounting SetupUser’s Guide describes how to setup and use this application.

Cost Management User’s GuideThe OPM Cost Management application is used by cost accountants to capture andreview the manufacturing costs incurred in their process manufacturing businesses.

xiv

Page 15: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

The Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management User’s Guide describes how tosetup and use this application.

Manufacturing Accounting Controller User’s GuideThe Manufacturing Accounting Controller application is where users define theimpact of manufacturing events on financials. For example, event RCPT (InventoryReceipts) results in a debit to inventory, a credit to accrued accounts payable, adebit or a credit to purchase price variance, etc. These impacts are predefined in theManufacturing Accounting Controller application so users may begin using OPM tocollect financial data out-of-the-box, however, they may also be adjusted per yourbusiness needs. The Oracle Process Manufacturing Manufacturing AccountingController User’s Guide describes how to setup and use this application.

Oracle Financials Integration User’s GuideSince OPM is closely integrated with Oracle General Ledger, financial data that iscollected about the manufacturing processes must be transferred to the OracleFinancials applications. The OPM Oracle Financials Integration application is whereusers define how that data is transferred. For example, users define whether data istransferred real time or batched and transferred at intervals. The Oracle ProcessManufacturing Oracle Financials Integration User’s Guide describes how to setup anduse this application.

Inventory Management User’s GuideThe OPM Inventory Management application is where data about the itemspurchased for, consumed during, and created as a result of the manufacturingprocess are tracked. The Oracle Process Manufacturing Inventory Management User’sGuide includes information to help you effectively work with the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Inventory application.

Physical Inventory User’s GuidePerforming physical inventory count is the most accurate way to get an accountingof all material quantities purchased, manufactured, and sold, and update youronhand quantities accordingly. The OPM Physical Inventory application automatesand enables the physical inventory process. The Oracle Process ManufacturingPhysical Inventory User’s Guide describes how to setup and use this application.

xv

Page 16: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Order Fulfillment User’s GuideThe OPM Order Fulfillment application automates sales order entry to reduce ordercycle time. Order Fulfillment enables order entry personnel to inform customers ofscheduled delivery dates and pricing. The Oracle Process Manufacturing OrderFulfillment User’s Guide describes how to setup and use this application.

Purchase Management User’s GuideOPM Purchase Management and Oracle Purchasing combine to provide anintegrated solution for Process Manufacturing. Purchase orders are entered inOracle Purchasing and received in OPM. Then, the receipts entered in OPM are sentto Oracle Purchasing. The Oracle Process Manufacturing Purchase Management User’sGuide describes how to setup and use this integrated solution.

Using Oracle Order Management with Process Inventory GuideOracle Process Manufacturing and Oracle Order Management combine to providean integrated solution for process manufacturers. The manufacturing process istracked and handled within Oracle Process Manufacturing, while sales orders aretaken and tracked in Oracle Order Management. Process attributes, such as dualUOM and lot control, are enabled depending on the inventory organization for theitem on the sales order. Order Management accepts orders entered through OracleCustomer Relationship Management (CRM). Within CRM, orders can originatefrom TeleSales, Sales Online, and iStore, and are booked in Order Management,making the CRM suite of products available to Process customers, through OrderManagement. The Oracle Order Management User’s Guide and Using Oracle OrderManagement with Process Inventory Guide describes how to setup and use thisintegrated solution.

Process Execution User’s GuideThe OPM Process Execution application lets you track firm planned orders andproduction batches from incoming materials through finished goods. Seamlesslyintegrated to the Product Development application, Process Execution lets youconvert firm planned orders to single or multiple production batches, allocateingredients, record actual ingredient usage, and then complete and closeproduction batches. Production inquiries and preformatted reports help youoptimize inventory costs while maintaining a high level of customer satisfactionwith on-time delivery of high quality products. The OPM Process Execution User’sGuide presents overviews of the tasks and responsibilities for the ProductionSupervisor and the Production Operator. It provides prerequisite setup in other

xvi

Page 17: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

applications, and details the windows, features, and functionality of the OPMProcess Execution application.

Integration with Advanced Planning and Scheduling User’s GuideOracle Process Manufacturing and Oracle Advanced Planning and Scheduling(APS) combine to provide an integrated solution for process manufacturers that canhelp increase planning efficiency. The integration provides for constraint-basedplanning, performance management, materials management by exception, mixedmode manufacturing that enables you to choose the best method to produce each ofyour products, and combine all of these methods within the same plant/company.The Oracle Process Manufacturing Integration with Advanced Planning and SchedulingUser’s Guide describes how to setup and use this application.

MPS/MRP and Forecasting User’s GuideThe Oracle Process Manufacturing Material Requirements Planning (MRP)application provides long-term "views" of material demands and projected supplyactions to satisfy those demands. The Master Production Scheduling (MPS)application lets you shorten that view to a much narrower and immediate timehorizon, and see the immediate effects of demand and supply actions. The OracleProcess Manufacturing MPS/MRP and Forecasting User’s Guide describes how to setupand use this application.

Capacity Planning User’s GuideThe OPM Capacity Planning User's Guide describes the setup required to use OPMwith the Oracle Applications Advanced Supply Chain Planning solutions. Inaddition, Resource setup, used by the OPM Production Execution and New ProductDevelopment applications, is also described.

Product Development User’s GuideThe Oracle Process Manufacturing Product Development application providesfeatures to manage formula and laboratory work within the process manufacturingoperation. It lets you manage multiple laboratory organizations and supportvarying product lines throughout the organization. You can characterize andsimulate the technical properties of ingredients and their effects on formulas. Youcan optimize formulations before beginning expensive laboratory test batches.Product Development coordinates each development function and enables a rapid,enterprise-wide implementation of new products in your plants. The Oracle ProcessManufacturing Product Development User’s Guide describes how to setup and use thisapplication.

xvii

Page 18: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Quality Management User’s GuideThe Oracle Process Manufacturing Quality Management application helps track thequality of ingredients and products throughout the process manufacturing cycle.Assays, also known as tests or ingredient attributes, and specifications are definedas requirements for acceptable item quality. Samples can be taken against whichresults are recorded for the required assays. Results can be reported through aCertificate of Analysis. The Oracle Process Manufacturing Quality Management User'sGuide describes how to setup and use this application.

Regulatory Management User’s GuideThe Oracle Process Manufacturing Regulatory Management application generatesthe Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) required by authorities to accompanyhazardous materials during shipping. You can create MSDSs from OPM FormulaManagement with Regulatory or Production effectivities. The Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide describes how to setup and usethis application.

Implementation GuideThe Oracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide offers information on setup.That is, those tasks you must complete following the initial installation of the OracleProcess Manufacturing software. Any tasks that must be completed in order to usethe system out-of-the-box are included in this manual.

System Administration User’s GuideMuch of the System Administration duties are performed at the OracleApplications level, and are therefore described in the Oracle Applications SystemAdministrator's Guide. The Oracle Process Manufacturing System Administration User’sGuide provides information on the few tasks that are specific to OPM. It offersinformation on performing OPM file purge and archive, and maintaining suchthings as responsibilities, units of measure, and organizations.

API User’s GuidesPublic Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) are available for use withdifferent areas of the Oracle Process Manufacturing application. APIs make itpossible to pass information into and out of the application, bypassing the userinterface. Use of these APIs is documented in individual manuals such as the OracleProcess Manufacturing Inventory API User’s Guide, Oracle Process ManufacturingProduction Management and Process Operations Control APIs User’s Guide, OracleProcess Manufacturing Formula API User's Guide, and the Oracle Process

xviii

Page 19: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Manufacturing Cost Management API User's Guide. Additional API User’s Guides areperiodically added as additional public APIs are made available.

Installation and System Administration

Oracle Applications ConceptsThis guide provides an introduction to the concepts, features, technology stack,architecture, and terminology for Oracle Applications Release 11i. It provides auseful first book to read before an installation of Oracle Applications. This guidealso introduces the concepts behind Applications-wide features such as BusinessIntelligence (BIS), languages and character sets, and Self-Service Web Applications.

Installing Oracle ApplicationsThis guide provides instructions for managing the installation of OracleApplications products. In Release 11i, much of the installation process is handledusing Oracle Rapid Install, which minimizes the time to install Oracle Applications,the Oracle8 technology stack, and the Oracle8i Server technology stack byautomating many of the required steps. This guide contains instructions for usingOracle Rapid Install and lists the tasks you need to perform to finish yourinstallation. You should use this guide in conjunction with individual productuser’s guides and implementation guides.

Upgrading Oracle ApplicationsRefer to this guide if you are upgrading your Oracle Applications Release 10.7 orRelease 11.0 products to Release 11i. This guide describes the upgrade process andlists database and product-specific upgrade tasks. You must be either at Release10.7 (NCA, SmartClient, or character mode) or Release 11.0, to upgrade to Release11i. You cannot upgrade to Release 11i directly from releases prior to 10.7.

Maintaining Oracle ApplicationsUse this guide to help you run the various AD utilities, such as AutoUpgrade,AutoPatch, AD Administration, AD Controller, AD Relink, License Manager, andothers. It contains how-to steps, screenshots, and other information that you need torun the AD utilities. This guide also provides information on maintaining theOracle applications file system and database.

xix

Page 20: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oracle Applications System Administrator’s GuideThis guide provides planning and reference information for the Oracle ApplicationsSystem Administrator. It contains information on how to define security, customizemenus and online help, and manage concurrent processing.

Oracle Alert User’s GuideThis guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status ofyour Oracle Applications data.

Oracle Applications Developer’s GuideThis guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle Applicationsdevelopment staff. It describes the Oracle Application Object Library componentsneeded to implement the Oracle Applications user interface described in the OracleApplications User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products. It also providesinformation to help you build your custom Oracle Forms Developer 6i forms so thatthey integrate with Oracle Applications.

Oracle Applications User Interface Standards for Forms-Based ProductsThis guide contains the user interface (UI) standards followed by the OracleApplications development staff. It describes the UI for the Oracle Applicationsproducts and how to apply this UI to the design of an application built by usingOracle Forms.

Other Implementation Documentation

Oracle Applications Product Update NotesUse this guide as a reference for upgrading an installation of Oracle Applications. Itprovides a history of the changes to individual Oracle Applications productsbetween Release 11.0 and Release 11i. It includes new features, enhancements, andchanges made to database objects, profile options, and seed data for this interval.

Multiple Reporting Currencies in Oracle ApplicationsIf you use the Multiple Reporting Currencies feature to record transactions in morethan one currency, use this manual before implementing Oracle ProcessManufacturing. This manual details additional steps and setup considerations forimplementing Oracle Process Manufacturing with this feature.

xx

Page 21: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Multiple Organizations in Oracle ApplicationsThis guide describes how to set up and use Oracle Process Manufacturing withOracle Applications' Multiple Organization support feature, so you can define andsupport different organization structures when running a single installation ofOracle Process Manufacturing.

Oracle Workflow GuideThis guide explains how to define new workflow business processes as well ascustomize existing Oracle Applications-embedded workflow processes. You alsouse this guide to complete the setup steps necessary for any Oracle Applicationsproduct that includes workflow-enabled processes.

Oracle Applications Flexfields GuideThis guide provides flexfields planning, setup and reference information for theOracle Process Manufacturing implementation team, as well as for usersresponsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle Applications product data. Thismanual also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data.

Oracle eTechnical Reference ManualsEach eTechnical Reference Manual (eTRM) contains database diagrams and adetailed description of database tables, forms, reports, and programs for a specificOracle Applications product. This information helps you convert data from yourexisting applications, integrate Oracle Applications data with non-Oracleapplications, and write custom reports for Oracle Applications products. OracleeTRM is available on Metalink

Oracle Manufacturing APIs and Open Interfaces ManualThis manual contains up-to-date information about integrating with other OracleManufacturing applications and with your other systems. This documentationincludes API’s and open interfaces found in Oracle Manufacturing.

Oracle Order Management Suite APIs and Open Interfaces ManualThis manual contains up-to-date information about integrating with other OracleManufacturing applications and with your other systems. This documentationincludes API’s and open interfaces found in Oracle Order Management Suite.

xxi

Page 22: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oracle Applications Message Reference ManualThis manual describes all Oracle Applications messages. This manual is available inHTML format on the documentation CD-ROM for Release 11i.

Training and Support

TrainingOracle offers a complete set of training courses to help you and your staff masterOracle Process Manufacturing and reach full productivity quickly. These coursesare organized into functional learning paths, so you take only those coursesappropriate to your job or area of responsibility.

You have a choice of educational environments. You can attend courses offered byOracle University at any one of our many Education Centers, you can arrange forour trainers to teach at your facility, or you can use Oracle Learning Network(OLN), Oracle University's online education utility. In addition, Oracle trainingprofessionals can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to meet yourneeds. For example, you may want to use your organization structure, terminology,and data as examples in a customized training session delivered at your ownfacility.

SupportFrom on-site support to central support, our team of experienced professionalsprovides the help and information you need to keep Oracle Process Manufacturingworking for you. This team includes your Technical Representative, AccountManager, and Oracle’s large staff of consultants and support specialists withexpertise in your business area, managing an Oracle8i server, and your hardwareand software environment.

Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications DataOracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle DataBrowser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle Applications dataunless otherwise instructed.

Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, andmaintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such asSQL*Plus to modify Oracle Applications data, you risk destroying the integrity ofyour data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data.

xxii

Page 23: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Because Oracle Applications tables are interrelated, any change you make usingOracle Applications can update many tables at once. But when you modify OracleApplications data using anything other than Oracle Applications, you may change arow in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables. If yourtables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneousinformation and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle Applications.

When you use Oracle Applications to modify your data, Oracle Applicationsautomatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle Applications also keepstrack of who changes information. If you enter information into database tablesusing database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability totrack who has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other databasetools do not keep a record of changes.

About OracleOracle Corporation develops and markets an integrated line of software productsfor database management, applications development, decision support, and officeautomation, as well as Oracle Applications, an integrated suite of more than 160software modules for financial management, supply chain management,manufacturing, project systems, human resources and customer relationshipmanagement.

Oracle products are available for mainframes, minicomputers, personal computers,network computers and personal digital assistants, allowing organizations tointegrate different computers, different operating systems, different networks, andeven different database management systems, into a single, unified computing andinformation resource.

Oracle is the world’s leading supplier of software for information management, andthe world’s second largest software company. Oracle offers its database, tools, andapplications products, along with related consulting, education, and supportservices, in over 145 countries around the world.

Your FeedbackThank you for using Oracle Process Manufacturing and this user’s guide.

Oracle values your comments and feedback. At the beginning of this guide is aReader’s Comment Form you can use to explain what you like or dislike aboutOracle Process Manufacturing or this user’s guide. Mail your comments to thefollowing address or call us directly at (650) 506-7000.

xxiii

Page 24: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oracle Applications Documentation ManagerOracle Corporation500 Oracle ParkwayRedwood Shores, CA 94065U.S.A.

Or, send electronic mail to [email protected].

xxiv

Page 25: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding New Product Develop

1

Understanding New Product Development

This topic provides the fundamentals of New Product Development. It presents thebasic tasks, responsibilities, and process flow required to develop a new product.You are given a basic understanding of navigation, workbenches, the statusapproval workflow, and version control. You are shown how to add and edit statuscodes.

The following topics are covered:

� About This Guide

� About New Product Development

� Tasks and Responsibilities

� Process Flow

� Understanding Navigation

� Understanding Workbenches

� Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

� Adding and Editing Status Codes

� Understanding Version Control

ment 1-1

Page 26: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

About This Guide

About This GuideThe purpose of this guide is to provide reference information for end-level users ofthe OPM New Product Development application. It presents:

� Overviews of all the processes that comprise the New Product Developmentapplication, and how these were developed from a detailed analysis of the tasksand responsibilities.

� Overviews of navigation, workbenches, status approval workflow, and versioncontrol.

� Prerequisite setup in the OPM System Administration, OPM Inventory Control,and OPM Cost Management applications.

� Setup required in the New Product Development application for:responsibilities and menu access, formula classes, operation classes, routingclasses, activities, resources, plant resources, laboratories, technical parameters,technical parameter sequences, and technical class and subclass category sets.

� Procedures for formula management, including: entering item technical data,using the laboratory spreadsheet, setting up formula information, usingformula phantoms, defining and maintaining formulas, using formulasummaries, entering formula details and editing formula lines, performing aningredient where used inquiry, running an Indented Bill of Materials Report,using formula inquiry, interpreting a formula inquiry, analyzing a formula,displaying formula analysis results, finding a formula analysis, and overridingdefault explosion rules. Procedures are also provided for using the RoutingDesigner.

� Procedures for operation management, including: defining and maintainingoperations, defining and maintaining activities, defining and maintainingresources, finding an operation, displaying operations summaries, enteringoperation activity details, entering activity resource details, displayingoperation activity lines, and, editing resource lines.

� Procedures for routing management, including: defining and maintainingroutings, finding a routing, using routing summaries, entering routing details,displaying routing step line summaries, editing routing step lines, enteringrouting step dependencies and, displaying and editing theoretical process loss.

� Procedures for recipe management, including: defining and maintainingrecipes, finding a recipe, displaying recipe summaries, understanding stepquantity calculations, entering recipe details, entering recipe organizationdetails, entering multi-record validity rules, editing validity rules, and

1-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 27: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

About This Guide

displaying the recipe step and material association. Procedures are alsoprovided for using the Recipe Designer.

� Procedures for mass search and replace, including: understanding search andreplace, mass search and replace security, performing a search and replace, andusing the Replace Results window.

Depending on your system security profile, it is possible that you do not haveaccess to all of the windows and functions described in this guide. If you do not seea menu option described, and you need to access it, contact your systemadministrator.

Understanding New Product Development 1-3

Page 28: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

About New Product Development

About New Product DevelopmentReducing time to market is one of the most important objectives in developing asuccessful new product. Research shows that one of the strongest drivers for ontime product delivery is the use of a cross-functional, dedicated, and accountableteam. To be successful, the team needs a strong leader and top managementsupport. Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development delivers aseamless, development environment that helps your team:

� Reduce time to market by using a solid framework that manages recipes fromconcept through production.

� Expand the enterprise by strengthening relationships with vendors andcustomers.

� Share project information and collaborate globally using the Internet.

� Manage quality processes proactively.

� Streamline production efficiencies.

New Product Development enhances product consistency and reduces the costsassociated with creating and modifying formulas by letting you adapt quickly todifferent research and development environments. You are able to manage manylaboratory organizations and support varying product lines throughout theorganization. You can characterize and simulate the technical properties ofingredients and their effects on formulas. You can optimize formulations beforebeginning expensive laboratory test batches. New Product Developmentcoordinates each development function and enables a rapid, enterprise-wideimplementation of new products in your plants.

By managing a recipe from its inception through production you have the ability toreduce the overall product development life cycle time. Recipes account not only foringredient usage, but also for quality characteristics of those ingredients, costingimplications of any alternate materials or processes, specific requirements ofcustomers, corporate manufacturing standards, and regulatory compliance issues.New Product Development combines the previous Laboratory and FormulaManagement applications into a single, integrated, secure formulation environment.Formulators and Process Engineers are able to collaborate in the development andmaintenance of new and existing products using a workbench. The workbench is ajob specific role that enables rapid definition and easier maintenance of recipecomponents. Workbenches increase formula usage flexibility to streamline theoverall production process.

1-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 29: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Tasks and Responsibilities

Tasks and ResponsibilitiesOne of the most challenging aspects of new product development is effectiveinformation transfer. Each job role must collaborate at various points throughoutthe product development cycle.

The following is representative of the work breakdown structure required todevelop a new product. It lists most of the key tasks and the job titles responsiblefor those tasks:

� Define product requirements.

� Product Development Manager

� Marketing Manager

� Customer

� Search for or copy a formula.

� Formulator

� Define ingredient parameters.

� Formulator

� Prototype the formula.

� Formulator

� Determine production feasibility of the prototype formula.

� Formulator

� Purchasing

� Determine formula reproducibility using laboratory scale batches.

� Formulator

� Tester

� Determine formula stability.

� Formulator

� Packaging Engineer

� Evaluate quality control specifications.

� Formulator

� Tester

Understanding New Product Development 1-5

Page 30: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Tasks and Responsibilities

� Create a routing.

� Packaging Engineer

� Process Engineer

� Run pilot plant batches.

� Process Engineer

� Select the optimal recipe.

� Marketing Manager

� Customer

� Obtain field approvals.

� Plant Manager

� Process Engineer

� Assign effective date use.

� Formulator

� Process Engineer

1-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 31: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Process Flow

Process FlowThe New Product Development application provides a seamless integration of thework breakdown structure outlined in the Tasks and Responsibilities topic. TheNew Product Development process flow consists of the following steps in each ofthe applications listed. Prerequisite Setup is required before the remaining steps arecompleted. Formula Setup and Creation, Laboratory Setup, and Routing Setup andCreation can be performed in parallel. Recipe Creation ties all the precedingactivities together.

Prerequisite SetupPrerequisite setup must be completed for each of the following applications:

� OPM System Administration

� Set up required profile options as described in Oracle Process ManufacturingImplementation Guide, Oracle Inventory User’s Guide, and Oracle Workflow.Required.

� Set up Responsibilities for Formulator, Process Engineer, ProductDevelopment Security Manager, and Product Development Security ProfileManager. Required.

� Set up Version Control. Required.

� Set up the Status Approval Workflow. Optional.

� Set up Mass Search and Replace security.

� OPM Inventory Control

� Set up items, item attributes, unit of measure conversions, and item lot andsublot conversions. Required.

� OPM Cost Management

� Set up cost analysis codes and the cost calendar. Required.

Formula Setup and CreationFormula setup and creation is performed in:

� Formulator

� Set up formula classes. Optional.

� Create new formulas. Required.

Understanding New Product Development 1-7

Page 32: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Process Flow

Laboratory SetupLaboratory setup is performed in:

� Formulator

� Set up laboratories. Optional.

� Set up technical parameters. Optional.

� Set up technical parameter sequences. Optional.

Routing Setup and CreationRouting setup and creation is performed in:

� Process Engineer

� Set up operation classes. Optional.

� Set up routing classes. Optional.

� Set up resources. Required if setting up operations.

� Set up plant resources. Required if setting up operations.

� Set up activities. Required if setting up operations.

� Create new operations. Required if setting up routings.

� Create new routings. Required if using routings in recipes.

Recipe CreationRecipe creation is performed in:

� Formulator

� Create new recipes. Required.

1-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 33: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Process Flow

The following depicts the previously described process flow:

Understanding New Product Development 1-9

Page 34: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Navigation

Understanding NavigationThe following information is a summary of more detailed discussions found in theOracle Applications User’s Guide.

Navigating the New Product Development Application:In addition to the standard menu and toolbar, a navigator tree provides ahierarchical display of the objects in a treelike framework.

Node and LeafThe higher level nodes in the navigator tree include forms and database objects. Allother nodes, and the objects they contain, are indented to indicate that they belongto these higher level nodes. The terminal node is a leaf. The New ProductDevelopment application uses Data Organizer tabs to group various objects such asrecipes, formulas, routing and operations. Refer to Identifying Nodes and Tabs onthe Navigator for specific nodes and tabs that are used in the New ProductDevelopment application.

Menu and ToolbarMenu and toolbar components let you access all globally available functions.

Data OrganizerThe Data Organizer groups objects on separate tabs. Each has a unique icon and itsown tree hierarchy.

Summary ViewsSummary views provide the highest level of business information and displayinformation. When you select any container on the Data Organizer navigator tree,the summary view can also list the contents of the container in a multirecord block.

Detail ViewsDetail views let you display and edit information.

See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide for more information on navigation.

�� To navigate the New Product Development application:The following is a typical flow through the New Product Development applicationData Organizer navigator tree:

1-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 35: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Navigation

1. Open the appropriate Formulator or Process Engineer workbench. These areassigned by the System Administrator.

2. Click the region that contains the object type of interest. For example, theProcess Engineer workbench includes these tabs:

� Recipe

� Formula

� Routing

� Operation

3. Select the appropriate View By field. This field presents records sorted andgrouped by the selection you make. View By fields include:

� Recipe, Formula, Routing, or Operation

� Status

� Owner

� Class

4. Use one of the following methods to find the appropriate object:

� Expand or collapse entries in the hierarchical Data Organizer tree.

� Perform a Find operation from the View menu, choose the appropriateobject from the results, and optionally, save the object in a Personal orPublic folder. Optionally, use the right mouse click feature to perform aFind operation.

5. Use one of the following methods to show selected object Details:

� Select the object in the Summary view, and click Details.

� Select the top node of an expanded object on the navigator tree, and chooseNew from the File menu.

� Select the top node of an expanded object on the navigator tree, and rightmouse click. Select New from the right mouse click menu.

6. Double-click an expanded node in the Data Organizer until you reach theterminal or leaf object. When you click this object, it opens.

7. Perform actions on the selected object. Navigate from the Detail views to otherrelated items of interest.

Understanding New Product Development 1-11

Page 36: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Navigation

8. Use the right mouse click menu to copy objects from the navigator tree nodesand paste them into your Personal Shortcuts. You can retrieve these objectswithout the need to find them by methods previously described.

1-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 37: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Navigation

Identifying N odes and Tabs on the Navigator Tree:The following discussion and graphic identify and explain each of the nodes andtabs displayed on the navigator tree.

� 1 is a Routing node. It identifies a Routing on the Navigator.

� 2 is a Routing tab. Select it to display all Routing available to yourResponsibility.

� 3 is an Operation node. It identifies an Operation on the Navigator.

� 4 is an Operation tab. Select it to display all Operations available to yourResponsibility

� 5 is an Activity node. It identifies an Activity on the Navigator.

� 6 is a Resource node. It identifies a Resource on the Navigator.

� 7 is a Formula node. It identifies a Formula on the Navigator.

� 8 is a Formula tab. Select it to display all Formulas available to yourResponsibility.

� 9 is a Product node. It identifies a Product on the Navigator.

� 10 is a By-Product node. It identifies a By-Product on the Navigator.

� 11 is an Ingredient node. It identifies an Ingredient on the Navigator.

� 12 is a Recipe node. It identifies a Recipe on the Navigator.

� 13 is a Recipe tab. Select it to view all Recipes available to your Responsibility.

� 14 is an Owner node. It identifies an Owner on the Navigator.

� 15 is a Class node. It identifies a Class on the Navigator.

� 16 is a Status node. It identifies a Status on the Navigator.

Understanding New Product Development 1-13

Page 38: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Workbenches

Understanding WorkbenchesThe workbench provides you with a complete product, production, technical andcost profiling tool that enables you to model a new product and help you meetinitial product specifications rapidly.

One of the major benefits of using a workbench is that you are able to perform whatif analyses to facilitate the overall formulation process.

The workbench concept is different from previous approaches used to developproducts by process manufacturers. Since new products are developed in thelaboratory, the list of ingredients and products are recorded in the laboratoryformula. Once the development is complete, production and cost formulas arerequired to manufacture and assign a cost to the product. With the FormulatorWorkbench, laboratory and production formulas are differentiated by a change inStatus. Changing the status of an experimental formula for use by production,costing, or a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) replaces the previous Formulaupload and download functions with a new business process.

By coupling the workbench capability to a Status Approval Workflow, the entireprocess of initiating and monitoring the development of a new product issimplified.

�� To display the Process Engineer Workbench:1. Navigate to the Product Development Workbench.

2. Expand Routings to view a summary of routings available to yourresponsibility. Expand Operations, Formulas and Recipes available to yourresponsibility as appropriate.

3. Expand Personal Shortcuts to view a summary of all of the personal shortcutsavailable to your responsibility.

4. Expand Public Shortcuts to view a summary of all public shortcuts available toyour responsibility.

�� To display the Formulator Workbench:1. Navigate to the Formulator Workbench.

2. Expand Formulas to view a summary of formulas available to yourresponsibility. Expand Recipes, Routings, and Operations available to yourresponsibility as appropriate.

1-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 39: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Workbenches

3. Expand Personal Shortcuts to view a summary of all personal shortcutsavailable to your responsibility.

4. Expand Public Shortcuts to view a summary of all public shortcuts available toyour responsibility.

See AlsoOracle Applications User’s Guide

Understanding New Product Development 1-15

Page 40: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

Understanding the Status Approval WorkflowWhen the Status Approval Workflow is activated, recipes, formulas, routings,operations, and validity rules require a series of approvals that result in reassigningtheir statuses through a predefined approval process. Laboratory Approval isoptional in this workflow.

Individual tasks are included in each topic to show you how to manage theapproval workflow process.

Understanding Workflow ProcessesOracle Workflow lets you automate and continuously improve business processesby routing information according to a set of business rules. You transmit thisinformation to individuals both inside and outside your enterprise as needed.

Setting Up ApproversThe Status Approval Workflow routes information to an approver. An approver isan individual or a group. Any individual associated with that approver is able to acton the notification. Each notification includes a message associated with all theinformation an individual must make a decision. Some possible responses are alsoincluded. The Status Approval Workflow interprets each response and moves on tothe next workflow activity.

Setting Up Workflow ProcessesIn order for a workflow to operate properly, set up the Oracle Workflow applicationas described in the Oracle Workflow Guide.

A workflow process starts when an application calls a set of Oracle WorkflowEngine Application Program Interfaces (APIs). The workflow itself is depicted as aprocess diagram containing icons that represent activities. The process containsseveral workflow steps that include approvers, activities, and decision trees that areneeded to complete the workflow.

Delivering Electronic NotificationsOracle Workflow enables you to let people receive notifications of items awaitingtheir attention through electronic mail by using a web browser, or on a NotificationSummary window in Oracle Applications.

1-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 41: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

Setting Up the Status Approval WorkflowSet up the Status Approval Workflow in the OPM System Administrationapplication. Contact your System Administrator if you are not sure that this is setup.

Your OPM System Administrator must set up the following windows:

� Workflow Process Activation to define the approval processes that use thegeneric workflow process configuration framework. This window enables ordisables the approval process in the database instance.

� Workflow Process Configuration Framework to define the configurationparameters for each approval process. These configuration parameterscustomize the approval process. For example, if a configuration parameter isspecified as organization, the approval process for an organization could beenabled or disabled.

� Workflow Activity Approval Configuration Framework to define theconfiguration parameters for each approval process activity. Theseconfiguration parameters customize the behavior of an activity. For example, ifthe configuration parameter is specified as organization, the approval processactivity behavior could be customized for an organization.

� Workflow Process Configuration to customize the approval process behaviorat a customer site. Approval can be required based on a business processrequirement. This window lets you enable or disable the approval processbased on parameters that you defined in the Approval Process ConfigurationFramework.

� Workflow Activity Configuration to customize the approval process activitiesbehavior based on configuration parameters defined in the Approval ProcessActivity Configuration Workflow. Enable or disable an activity and define anapprover if the activity requires approval.

If the workflow does not start, the Workflow Activation window can be set toDeactivate. Contact your OPM System Administrator to determine if this windowand all appropriate triggers have been set properly.

See: Oracle Process Manufacturing System Administration User’s Guide for moreinformation.

Note: New Product Development Workflows do not function ifseed data is disturbed.

Understanding New Product Development 1-17

Page 42: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

Enabling the Status Approval WorkflowEnable the Status Approval Workflow by setting it up in the System Administrationapplication. Once it is set up and operating, the workflow is activated by changingthe Status of a recipe, formula, routing, operation, or validity rule from NEW to anyof the other available status.

Adding and Editing Status Codes to the Status Approval WorkflowIf you modify or delete any of the predefined status codes that are supplied withthis application, the Status Approval Workflow does not run as described in thisdocumentation. You have the capability to add or edit status codes as described inthe Adding and Editing Status Codes topic.

Understanding the Status Approval WorkflowWhen a recipe, or validity rule is created, the workflow runs as follows:

1. Upon creation, by default, the Status for a recipe, formula, routing, operation,or validity rule is assigned the Status NEW.

2. If you choose Change Status from the Actions menu and then select Approvedfor Laboratory Use, the workflow changes Status to Request Approval forLaboratory Use. Once approved, Status changes to Approved for LaboratoryUse.

3. If you choose Change Status from the Actions menu and then select Approvedfor General Use, the workflow changes Status to Request Approval forGeneral Use. Once approved, Status changes to Approved for General Use.

4. You have the option to assign the Status Obsolete or Archived.

5. An Approved for Laboratory Use status can be assigned these statuses:

� On Hold

� Obsolete or Archived

6. An Approved for General Use status can be assigned these statuses:

� On Hold

� Frozen

� Obsolete or Archived

7. A Pending Approval for Laboratory status or a Pending Approval for GeneralUse status can be assigned these statuses:

� Obsolete

1-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 43: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

� Archived

8. Formulas, routings, operations, recipes, or validity rules that:

� Fail the approval of Pending Approval for Laboratory Use Status areassigned the Status Revise for Laboratory Use.

� Fail the approval of Request Approval for General Use Status are assignedthe Status Revise for General Use.

Understanding New Product Development 1-19

Page 44: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

The following graphic depicts the previously described Status Approval Workflow:

1-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 45: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Status Approval Workflow

Disabling the Status Approval WorkflowThe System Administrator must disable the Status Approval Workflow. If theworkflow is disabled, you can still change the Status of a recipe, formula, routing,operation, or validity rule. However, the Status change does not initiate the StatusApproval Workflow.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing System Administration User’s Guide

Understanding New Product Development 1-21

Page 46: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Adding and Editing Status Codes

Adding and Editing Status CodesYou are able to add to or edit the predefined status codes listed in Appendix C ofthis user’s guide. Modification or deletion of the predefined status codes that aresupplied with the application may result in the Status Approval Workflow notrunning as described in this documentation.

Do not delete predefined status codes since this could result in unexpected behaviorof the application.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Read the Understanding the Status Approval Workflow topic.

�� To add a new status code:1. Navigate to the Status Codes window.

2. Choose New from the File menu. A new row appears for the new Status Codeyou want to add.

3. Enter a new Status Code number. The number you enter is sorted intoascending order with the other status codes when you save and reopen theStatus Codes window.

Codes entered between any two predefined codes, such as 101 to 199, or 201 to299 are included in the workflow associated with the predefined status codewith the same first digit. For example, if you enter the code 110, it becomes partof the workflow associated to Code 100. If you enter a code number 699, itbecomes part of the workflow associated to Code 600. Predefined status codesare shown in a table at the end of this task. Required.

4. Enter a brief explanation of the new Status Code in the Description field.Required.

5. Enter the information that you want to display on the Status field for the StatusCode in the Meaning field. Required.

6. The Enable Version check box determines whether the status code entered isset up for version control. Any modification made to an operation, routing,formula, or recipe while it is set to the status entered in the Meaning fieldinitiates or bypasses activation of a new version depending on the selection youmake here, and the value entered for the appropriate version control profileoption.

1-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 47: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Adding and Editing Status Codes

� Select the check box if you want the status code to enable version controlwhen a modification is made to an operation, routing, formula, or recipe.The appropriate version control profile option must be set to Yes orOptional.

� Clear the check box if you want the status code to bypass version controlwhen a modification is made to an operation, routing, formula, or recipe.

7. Save the window.

8. Click Details to enter Status Details as described in the Entering Status Detailstopic.

The following are the required predefined status codes:

Code Meaning Description Version Enabled

100 New Formulation stage. Can makechanges at any time, assumingsecurity access.

Yes

200 Request Approval forLaboratory Use

Submitted for approval of use inLaboratory runs.

No

300 Revise for Laboratory Approval has failed and rework isrequired

No

400 Approved forLaboratory Use

Can be used in Laboratory batchesand cost rollups for Laboratory

Yes

500 Request Approval forGeneral Use

Submitted for final approval No

600 Revise for GeneralUse

Approval has failed and rework isrequired

Yes

700 Approved forGeneral Use

Can be used for production batches,cost rollups

Yes

800 On Hold Object cannot be used until status ischanged

No

900 Frozen Prevents further changes to objectand any dependent data. Object canstill be used.

No

1000 Obsolete/Archived Object can no longer be used unlessstatus is changed.

No

Understanding New Product Development 1-23

Page 48: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Adding and Editing Status Codes

�� To edit an existing status code:1. Navigate to the Status Codes window.

2. Edit the following fields as required:

� Description, to change the explanation of the status code.

� Meaning, to change the information displayed on the Status field in theapplication.

3. The Enable Version check box determines whether the status code entered isset up for version control. Any modification made to an operation, routing,formula, or recipe while it is set to the status entered in the Meaning fieldinitiates or bypasses activation of a new version depending on the selection youmake here, and the value entered for the appropriate version control profileoption.

� Select the check box if you want the Status Code to enable version controlwhen a modification is made to an operation, routing, formula, or recipe.The appropriate version control profile option must be set to Yes orOptional.

� Clear the check box if you want the Status Code to bypass version controlwhen a modification is made to an operation, routing, formula, or recipe.

4. Click Details. The Status Details window displays.

5. Edit the following fields as required:

� Target Status, to change the code that appears as the destination status onthe Change Status window.

� Rework Status, to change the destination for the listed status code when itis not accepted and must be reworked.

� Pending Status, to change the destination of the listed status code when itenters the approval workflow, and is pending approval.

Required.

6. Edit the Workflow Indicator by selecting:

� Enable or Disable Workflow to indicate that the fields listed in the rowenable or disable the workflow.

� Workflow Approval to indicate that the fields listed in the row requireworkflow approval.

1-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 49: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Adding and Editing Status Codes

� No Workflow Approval to indicate that the fields listed in the row do notrequire workflow approval.

Required.

7. Click OK.

8. Save the window.

Entering Status DetailsThe Status Details window enables you to enter a target status for a new statuscode. You can optionally enter rework status, pending status, and assign aworkflow indicator.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

�� To enter status details:1. Enter a Target Status for the new Status Code. This is the code that appears as

the destination status on the Change Status window. You have the ability toenter several Target Status destinations for each Status Code. They must beentered on separate lines. Required.

2. Optionally, enter a Rework Status for the new Status Code. The Rework Statuscode defines the destination for the listed Status Code when it is not acceptedand must be reworked.

3. Optionally, enter a Pending Status for the new Status Code. The Pending Statuscode defines a destination of the listed Status Code when it enters the approvalworkflow and is pending approval.

4. Select one of the following as Workflow Indicator:

� Enable or Disable Workflow to indicate that the fields listed in the rowenable or disable the workflow.

� Workflow Approval to indicate that the fields listed in the row requireworkflow approval.

� No Workflow Approval to indicate that the fields listed in the row do notrequire workflow approval.

Required.

5. Click OK.

Understanding New Product Development 1-25

Page 50: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Adding and Editing Status Codes

6. Save the window.

Finding a Status CodeThe Find Status Codes window lets you find a status code by code number,description, version enabled, or mark for purge status.

�� To find a status code:1. Navigate to the Find Status Codes window.

2. Enter one or more of the following fields to narrow your search:

� Status Code, to find a specific code number.

� Description, to find a specific status code description.

� The Version Enabled check box determines whether the status code enteredis set up for version control. Any modification made to an operation,routing, formula, recipe, or validity rule while it is set to the status enteredin the Meaning field initiates or bypasses activation of a new versiondepending on the selection you make here, and the value entered for theappropriate version control profile option.

– Select the check box if you want to find the status codes that enable versioncontrol when a modification is made to an operation, routing, formula,recipe, or validity rule. The appropriate version control profile option mustbe set to Yes or Optional.

– Clear the check box if you do not want to find the status codes that bypassversion control when a modification is made to an operation, routing,formula, recipe, or validity rule.

� The Mark For Deletion list box lets you find status codes with the status:

– Yes indicating the status code has been marked for purge

– No indicating that the status code has been undeleted.

3. Click Find to display the results of your query.

4. Click the down arrow to display all status codes that were found.

5. Optionally, click New to enter a new status code. The Status Codes windowdisplays.

1-26 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 51: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Version Control

Understanding Version ControlSome businesses require version control to generate an audit trail. By monitoringversion changes you define rules for modifying recipes, formulas, routings,operations, and quality specifications. The New Product Development VersionControl function lets you determine if an existing version can be modified, or if anew version must be created. New Product Development gives you the ability to:

� Force the creation of new versions so that transaction sources stay intact.

� Deliver a combination of forced version creation and no version control.

� Provide no version control.

These decisions are made at the organization level with proper assignment of UserResponsibilities. Status must be Approved for General Use for Version Control to beactive. All other statuses do not require that a new version be created each time achange is made.

Version Control does not validate the Formula, Routing, or Version fields on arecipe header. These fields cannot be changed once a recipe is saved. A new recipemust be created in order to change these fields, whether or not Version Control isused. Version Control does not take the Status field into account when determiningwhether a new version should be created. This is also true for Mark for Purge andUndelete functions.

How Does Version Control Work?Profile options for Version Control are:

� GMD: Recipe Version Control

� GMD: Formula Version Control

� GMD: Routing Version Control

� GMD: Operation Version Control

Each profile option is set to one of the following profile values:

� Y means Yes, indicating that Version Control is activated and any change maderequires a new version.

� N means No, indicating that Version Control is not activated and any changecan be made to the existing version.

� O means Optional, indicating that Version Control is optional. You are asked ifyou want to create a new version if any change is made to the existing version.

Understanding New Product Development 1-27

Page 52: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Version Control

You can set Version Control to any appropriate level of activation. In practice, it is agood idea to set Version Control profile options initially to O. You are notified eachtime you attempt to save changes. The setting of these options is totally a matter ofyour individual business requirements.

See: Oracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide for more specific details onsetting these profile options.

Setting Up Version Control at the Organization and Responsibility LevelYou must be associated with valid organizations in order to create transactions andperform certain functions in New Product Development. You must be linked toappropriate Responsibilities in order to access specific workbenches. If newResponsibilities are implemented as described in the following example, you canachieve Version Control by association to an organization through a link to aspecific Responsibility within the organization. Here is an example of how to set upVersion Control:

Users are defined as:ABC for Formulator ABC

JKL for Formulator JKL

XYZ for Formulator XYZ

Organizations are:OA for Oracle Applications

OPM for Oracle Process Manufacturing Company, consisting of:

PLT1 for Plant1

PLT2 for Plant2

PLT3 for Plant3

Responsibilities are:Formulator for PLT1

Formulator for PLT2

Formulator for PLT3

User-Organization Associations are:ABC for PLT1

1-28 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 53: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Version Control

JKL for PLT1

XYZ for PLT1

User-Responsibility Associations are:ABC for Formulator PLT1

JKL for Formulator PLT2

XYZ for Formulator PLT3

Profile Settings are:GMD: Formula Version Control is set to Y for the Responsibility of FormulatorPLT1

At logon, User ABC is presented with a list of Responsibilities for Formulator PLT1.Menus and windows associated with the Formulator Responsibility are accessibleto User ABC, and they are configurable. Specific windows and functions can beenabled or disabled within Menus and Responsibilities. Since the user organizationassociation for User ABC is limited to PLT1, and the Formula Version Controlprofile option is enabled for this Responsibility, any modifications made to aformula during the session for User ABC requires a new version of a formula forPLT1.

If User ABC were to change to a Responsibility where Version Control was set to N,modifications to a formula in that session would not require a new formula versionto be created.

If User ABC were to change to a Responsibility where Version Control was set to O,modifications to a formula in that session would notify User ABC that VersionControl was optional. Prior to saving a change, User ABC is asked whether or not tochange the existing formula version.

Understanding New Product Development 1-29

Page 54: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Version Control

1-30 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 55: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setti

2

Setting Up

This topic provides the setup requirements in other applications, and setuprequired in New Product Development. You must set up responsibilities and menuaccess. Depending on your individual requirements you set up formula classes,operation classes, routing classes, activities, resources, plant resources, laboratories,technical parameters, technical parameter sequences, and technical class andsubclass category sets.

The following topics provide the information required to set up New ProductDevelopment:

� Setting Up in Other Applications

� Setting Up Responsibilities and Menu Access

� Setting Up Formula Classes

� Setting Up Operation Classes

� Setting Up Routing Classes

� Setting Up Activities

� Setting Up Laboratories

� Setting Up Technical Parameters

� Setting Up Technical Parameter Sequences

� Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

ng Up 2-1

Page 56: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up in Other Applications

Setting Up in Other ApplicationsSet up these prerequisites prior to running the New Product Developmentapplication:

Setting Up Profile Options in OPM System AdministrationIn the System Administration Responsibility, set up the following profile options:

� GMD: Byproduct Active

� GMD: Default Consumption/Yield Type

� GMD: Default Lab Organization

� GMD: Default Step Release Type

� GMD: Density

� GMD: Display Specifications

� GMD: Effective Maximum Date

� GMD: Effective Minimum Date

� GMD: Exact Specification Match

� GMD: Formula Version Control

� GMD: Operation Version Control

� GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph

� GMD: QC Grade

� GMD: Recipe Version Control

� GMD: Routing Version Control

� GMD: Scrap Factor Type

� GMD: UOM Mass Type

� GMD: UOM Volume Type

� GMD: User Name for ALL

� GMD: Workflow Timeout (in Days)

� GMD: Yield Type

2-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 57: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up in Other Applications

Set up the following:

� Units of Measure

� Units of Measure Classes

� Units of Measure Conversion

Use a common predefined unit of measure for the step quantity and chargescalculation process. This approach provides better performance. Conversions mustbe defined for individual items between the item unit of measure and the commonunit of measure. This eliminates the requirement to set up item conversionsbetween the item unit of measure and the associated operation unit of measure.

Setting Up the GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph Profile OptionMany windows in OPM applications let you associate text with any record of theedited document. For example, you can attach text to a specific ingredient line in aformula. In the Recipe Designer, paragraphs are structures that are used to storeand categorize text. The standard application has the General Text paragraph as theone default paragraph stored for each database table.

In order to provide the Recipe Designer with a means to distinguish betweenProcess Instructions and other text types that are stored, your System Administratorneeds to define a paragraph code for process instructions. Text that is displayed inthe Process Instruction Sheet of the Recipe Designer is the text defined for theparagraph code specified by the GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph profileoption.

�� To define a paragraph code for process instructions:1. Create a new paragraph code with a Sub Code, sub-paragraph code, equal to

zero for the following tables:

� FM_MATL_DTL, the Formula Material detail table

� FM_ROUT_DTL, the Routing Detail table

� GMD_RECIPE_ROUTING_STEPS, the Recipe Routing Steps table

� GMD_RECIPE_STEP_MATERIALS, the Operation Step and MaterialAssociation table

2. Specify the paragraph code defined in step 1 as the value for the new GMD:Process Instruction Paragraph profile option. The Recipe Designer reads theGMD: Process Instruction Paragraph profile option to determine the paragraphcode used to retrieve and store process instructions.

Setting Up 2-3

Page 58: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up in Other Applications

Refer to the Oracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide and the Oracle ProcessManufacturing System Administrator User’s Guide for additional information.

See AlsoOracle Workflow

Setting Up OPM Inventory ControlIn the OPM Inventory Control application, set up the following:

� Items and item attributes for every raw material, intermediate, and end item.

� Unit of measure conversions for each item, between the item's primaryinventory unit of measure and the unit of measure you use in the formulas, ifdifferent. This is entered on the Item/Lot Sublot Conversions window.

Unit of measure types, units of measure, unit of measure conversions, and specificconversions such as item lot and sublot conversions are synchronized withcorresponding Oracle Process Manufacturing Financials data.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Inventory Management User‘s Guide

Oracle Inventory User’s Guide

Setting Up Cost ManagementIn the Cost Management application, set up the following:

� Cost analysis codes

� Cost calendar

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management User’s Guide

Setting Up Process PlanningIn the OPM Capacity Planning application, set up the following:

� Resources

� Plant Resources

2-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 59: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up in Other Applications

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Capacity Planning User’s Guide

Setting Up Oracle Applications System AdministratorThe Recipe Designer uses a Thin Client Framework, or TCF technology. Two profileoptions are set up automatically by the installation script:

� TCF:HOST

� TCF:PORT

Refer to the "Profile Options in Oracle Application Object Library" topic in theOracle Applications System Administrator’s Guide for a detailed discussion of theseprofile options.

Setting Up Security ProfilesDepending on your security profile, some of the information on certain windowsmay not be available to you. Contact your Product Development Security Manageror Product Development Security Profile Manager if you require access to thisinformation.

Setting Up 2-5

Page 60: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Responsibilities and Menu Access

Setting Up Responsibilities and Menu AccessSet up Workbench Responsibilities for each user. The following are menu andsubmenu selections available to each listed Workbench Responsibility:

� Formulator

� Formulator Workbench

� Formulas

� Recipes

� Mass Search and Replace

� Spreadsheet

� Inventory Items

� Indented Formulas

� Formula Inquiry

� Technical Data: Technical Parameters

� Technical Data: Technical Parameter Sequences

� Technical Data: Item Technical Data

� Formula Analysis: Parameters

� Formula Analysis: Analysis

� Setup: Formula Class

� Setup: Status Codes

� Process Engineer

� Engineering Workbench

� Routings

� Operations

� Recipes

� Mass Search and Replace

� Setup: Routing Classes

� Setup: Operation Classes

� Setup: Activities

2-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 61: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Responsibilities and Menu Access

� Setup: Generic Resources

� Setup: Plant Resources

� Setup: Alternate Resources

� Setup: Status Codes

� Product Development Security Manager

� Product Development Security Profile Manager

Setting Up 2-7

Page 62: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Formula Classes

Setting Up Formula ClassesFormula Classes group formulas with similar characteristics and requirements forreporting purposes. For example, use a formula class to classify all formulas forACRYLIC paints, or to classify all formulas for ORGANIC paints. Food seasoningformulas could be grouped under a SEASONINGS class. You specify the formulaclass on the Formula Details window. Defining formula classes is optional.

Prerequisites� Analyze all formulas for common properties that are used to classify them.

�� To set up formula classification codes:1. Navigate to the Formula Classes window.

2. Enter the Class code that identifies formulas with similar characteristics orrequirements. Required.

3. Enter a brief Description of the classification you are adding. Required.

4. Save the window.

2-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 63: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Operation Classes

Setting Up Operation ClassesGroup operations with similar characteristics and requirements for reportingpurposes. For example, you could set up classes for MIXING, HEATING, DRYING,or GRINDING. Defining operation classes is optional.

Prerequisites� Analyze all operations for common properties that are used to classify them.

�� To set up operation classification codes:1. Navigate to the Operation Classes window.

2. Enter the Class code that identifies operations with similar characteristics orrequirements. Required.

3. Enter a brief Description of the classification you are adding. Required.

4. Save the window.

Setting Up 2-9

Page 64: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Routing Classes

Setting Up Routing ClassesRoutings are sequenced sets of operations that must be performed in order tocomplete a production batch. It is useful to set up routing classes to group routingswith similar characteristics and requirements for reporting purposes. Definingrouting classes is optional.

Prerequisites� Analyze all routings for common properties that are used to classify them.

�� To set up routing classification codes:1. Navigate to the Routing Classes window.

2. Enter the Class code that identifies routings with similar characteristics orrequirements. Required.

3. Enter a Routing Class Description for the Class code entered. Required.

4. Enter the UOM for the Class code.

5. Click Theoretical Process Loss to display the Theoretical Process Losswindow. Theoretical Process Loss is discussed in the Routings topic.

6. Save the window.

See AlsoRoutings

2-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 65: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Activities

Setting Up ActivitiesActivities are actions performed during production. For example, mixing andcooling are activities. Activities are usually set up so that they divide amanufacturing process into logical breakpoints. By analyzing and refining thegranularity of activities, businesses can improve their work methods and reducetime to manufacture so that activities performed in operations are completed in theshortest possible time with the least effort to deliver the appropriate level of quality.

Cost analysis codes are assigned to activities so that proper cost calculations can beperformed.

Prerequisites� Set up cost analysis codes.

�� To set up activities:1. Navigate to the Activities window.

2. Enter an Activity Code for the name of the activity. Activities are thecomponents that make up an operation. Required.

3. Enter a brief Description of the activity. Required.

4. Enter the cost Analysis Code. This code is set up in Cost Managementapplication. Required.

5. Save the window.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management User’s Guide

Setting Up 2-11

Page 66: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Laboratories

Setting Up LaboratoriesAfter meeting the prerequisites for setup in other applications, you must definelaboratories. Laboratories are used to group technical parameters.

Most organizations manufacture a variety of similar products that are oftengrouped into product lines or families. The same technical parameters are likely tobe relevant to the products within a product family and to the ingredients used tomanufacture those products. For example, viscosity is likely to be relevant to alllubricants, while opacity or contrast ratio is likely to be relevant to all paints.

When you set up an organization as a laboratory, verify that you select Laboratoryas the Plant type on the Organizations window in the System Administrationapplication. This laboratory organization defaults into the Laboratory field on eachwindow where you can enter Technical Parameters. It is the only Laboratory thatyou can use on the Laboratory Spreadsheet.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide

Oracle Process Manufacturing System Administration User’s Guide

2-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 67: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

Setting Up Technical ParametersTechnical parameters are those characteristics of items that you want to measureand calculate. There are several types of technical parameters. For example, agravimetric technical parameter for percent solids by weight (w/w) is Weight%.

For each type of technical parameter, specify certain constraints on the data that canbe entered for that parameter, such as the minimum and maximum values.

Prerequisites� Define a laboratory organization.

� Determine the hierarchy of technical parameters to be set up. For example,density, gram percent, gram molecular weight, formula weight, and osmolality.These must be developed so that they can be sequenced in a hierarchy that canbe rolled up to the product level.

�� To use expressions in technical parameters:The following functions are supported for defining expressions, and themathematical operators to use:

� Addition (+)

� Subtraction (-)

� Multiplication (*)

� Division (/)

� Exponentiation (^)

� Square Root (SQRT)

� Common Logarithm (LOG)

� Natural Logarithm (LN)

For example, if you are defining a technical parameter that is calculated bymultiplying two other technical parameters, PARM1 and PARM2, enter thefollowing:

PARM1*PARM2

To take the square root of PARM1, enter the following:

SQRT(PARM1)

Setting Up 2-13

Page 68: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

You cannot put spaces (blanks) in the name of a technical parameter that you use inan expression. For example, (PARM 1) * (PARM 2) cannot be calculated becausethere is an extra space before and after the * operator.

�� To use fixed expressions in technical parameters:Certain technical parameters are fixed expressions that can be summed up for allingredients in a formula. This is called a formula rollup.

The following technical parameter types are available:

� Weight Percent is calculated as the quantity Sigma ti multiplied by wi minus thequantity Sigma tj multiplied by wj divided by the quantity Sigma wi minus thequantity Sigma wj.

� Volume Percent is calculated as the quantity Sigma ti multiplied by vi minus thequantity Sigma tj multiplied by vj divided by the quantity Sigma vi minus thequantity Sigma vj.

� Specific Gravity is calculated as the quantity Sigma ti multiplied by vi minus thequantity Sigma tj multiplied by vj divided by the quantity Sigma vi minus thequantity Sigma vj.

� Cost is calculated as the quantity Sigma ti multiplied by Ii minus the quantitySigma tj multiplied by Ij.

� Equivalent Weight is calculated as the the quantity Sigma Ti minus the quantitySigma Tj divided by the quantity Sigma Tidivided by ti minus the quantitySigma Tj divided by tj.

� Quantity per Unit is calculated as the quantity Sigma ti multiplied by Ii minusthe quantity Sigma tj multiplied by Ij.

where:

� Sigma is summation over "i" ingredients or "j" byproducts

� ti is the value of the technical parameter for the "i-th" ingredient

� tj is the value of the technical parameter for the "j-th" byproduct

� wi is the weight of the "i-th" ingredient in the base unit of measure for mass

� wj is the weight of the "j-th" byproduct in the base unit of measure for mass

� vi is the volume of the "i-th" ingredient in the base unit of measure for volume

� vj is the volume of the "j-th" byproduct in the base unit of measure for volume

� Ii is the quantity of the "i-th" ingredient in its primary inventory unit of measure

2-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 69: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

� Ij is the quantity of the "j-th" byproduct in its primary inventory unit of measure

� Ti is the quantity of the "i-th" ingredient in the units specified for the technicalparameter

� Tj is the quantity of the "j-th" byproduct in the units specified for the technicalparameter

The following table displays the previously described calculations used for each ofthe listed technical parameter types.

Expressions are equations you define that use mathematical operators andpreviously defined technical parameters.

For example, a technical parameter could be defined as a percent solvent, with eachingredient in a formula contributing a differing portion of its weight to a product assolvent. Use the Technical Parameters window to set up various quantitativerelationships between individual parameters. The application finds the weight ofsolvent contributed by each ingredient and calculates the sum of thesecontributions. After determining the total formula weight, the application expressesthe ratio of percent solvent for each product.

Technical Parameter Type Calculation

Weight Percent

Volume Percent

Specific Gravity

Cost

Equivalent Weight

Quantity per Unit

Setting Up 2-15

Page 70: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

In addition to the technical parameters that you define on the Technical Parameterswindow, OPM automatically creates a technical parameter for density when youdefine a laboratory organization. The application uses this density technicalparameter for conversions from mass units of measure to and from volume units ofmeasure. It does not use the item specific unit of measure conversions set up on theItem Lot/Sublot Std Conversion window. It does, however, use the regular unit ofmeasure conversions for laboratory formulas. Enter data for the DENSITY technicalparameter for all items where you must convert mass to volume or volume to mass.

If this parameter is not set properly, spreadsheet calculations are inaccurate.

GMD: Density defines the density technical parameter.

�� To set up technical parameters:1. Navigate to the Technical Parameters window.

2. Enter the code for the Laboratory organization where you are defining atechnical parameter. A description of this laboratory displays. Required.

3. Enter the name of the technical Parameter Name. Required.

4. Enter a Description or statement about what the technical parameterrepresents. Required.

Quality Control Assay Link5. If you are linking this technical parameter to an assay in the Quality Control

application, enter the Organization code that identifies where the assay isdefined. Otherwise, leave this field blank.

6. If you are linking this technical parameter to a Quality Control assay, enter thename of the Assay. The assay must be defined with your organization code.Global assays cannot be used. Otherwise, leave this field blank.

Technical Parameters7. Select the Data Type to be associated with this technical parameter. Supply the

required information listed in the table at the end of this task. Only specificgravity, equivalent weight, and expressions are not validated against the unitsentered in the Quality Control application. Quality Control units of measure arefor notational purposes only, and are not used in calculations.

8. Enter the Unit of measure for the technical parameter. Technical parameters forspecific gravity and equivalent weight use the units of measure set up in theSystem Administration or Oracle Inventory applications. All other technicalparameters use the units of measure set up on the Units window in the Quality

2-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 71: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

Control application. With the exception of equivalent weight, this unit ofmeasure is not used in any calculations.

9. For Numeric Range assay data types:

� Enter the lower limit of the Numeric Range in the first field. Enter theupper limit of the range in the second field. For example, an entry of 20through 30 represents a Numeric Range from 20 to 30.

� Enter the number of Significant Digits to display for numeric expressionsand calculations.

10. Save the window.

Data Type Required Information

0 - Character Enter the minimum and maximum valid character strings basedon ASCII sort sequence and maximum length.

1 - Numeric � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

2 - Validation List � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter a list of valid values in the Validation List fields.

3 - Boolean No additional definition is required. The entry is unitless.

4 - Expression � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the mathematical expression for calculating thetechnical parameter in the Expression field.

5 - Weight Percent � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

6 - Volume Percent � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

Setting Up 2-17

Page 72: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameters

7 - Specific Gravity � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

8 - Cost � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

9 - Equivalent Weight � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

10 - Quantity Per Unit � Enter the Unit of Measure in the Unit field.

� Enter the minimum and maximum valid values in NumericRange fields.

� Enter the number of significant digits required in theSignificant Digits field.

Data Type Required Information

2-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 73: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Parameter Sequences

Setting Up Technical Parameter SequencesAfter entering the technical parameters for a laboratory organization, specify theorder displayed as the technical parameter sequences.

Expression type technical parameters that refer to other technical parameters mustcome after the technical parameters they reference in the sequence. For example, ifPARM_3 is calculated by multiplying PARM_1 by PARM_2, PARM_3 must comeafter PARM_1 and PARM_2 in the technical parameter sequences. By default, theDENSITY technical parameter, or its equivalent is 1. Do not change this.

Prerequisites� Determine if two or more technical parameters are required in a calculation. If

they are, verify their proper order prior to sequencing them in the TechnicalParameter Sequences window. For example, if you want to determine aBrix-to-Acid ratio, first enter the Brix calculation, then the Acid calculation, andfinally, the Brix/Acid calculation.

�� To set up technical parameter sequences:1. Navigate to the Technical Parameter Sequences window.

2. Enter the code for the Laboratory organization where you are setting up thetechnical parameter sequences. The default organization displays. Required.

Parameter Sequences3. Enter the code for a technical Parameter associated with the laboratory

organization entered. For example, enter GMW for gram molecular weight.

4. Enter a Sort number between 1 and 9999 to determine where in the list oftechnical parameters this parameter is displayed. When entering technicalparameter data, the technical parameters are displayed in numerical orderbased on the number entered in this field.

The numbers do not have to be sequential. For example, you could enter 10, 20,30, and so forth to accommodate for the future addition of technical parameters.

5. When the Quality Control check box is selected, the technical parameter islinked to a quality control assay. If the Quality Control check box is notselected, the technical parameter is not linked to a Quality Control assay.

6. The Description displays a brief statement about what the technical parameterrepresents, and is entered from the Quality Control Assay Test Description.

7. Save the window.

Setting Up 2-19

Page 74: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

Setting Up Technical Classes and SubclassesThe following procedures set up Technical Classes and Technical Subclasses foritems. You can access the Key Flexfield Segments window from the SystemAdministrator responsibility or from the Oracle Process Manufacturing InventoryControl application. In formula analysis, you can view results for the contributionof Technical Class or Technical Subclass in either weight or volume.

See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide.

Prerequisites� Determine whether Technical Class and Technical Subclass key flexfields are

already created.

�� To create key flexfields for Technical Class and Technical Subclass:1. Navigate to the Key Flexfield Segments window.

2. Choose Find... from the View menu to find all Key Flexfield Segments enteredfor the Oracle Inventory Item Categories Flexfield Title. Technical Class andTechnical Subclass are Item Categories that belong to the Oracle Inventoryapplication. The Key Flexfield Segments window displays all flexfields definedfor the Flexfield Title of Item Categories.

3. Insert a new row to create the Technical Class and Technical Subclassdefinition.

4. Enter the Code as TECH_CLASS_SUB_CLASS. The Title defaults to the Code.

5. Enter the Title and Description as Technical Class & Subclass.

6. Click Segments. The Segments Summary window displays for Technical Class& Subclass.

7. Enter two segments with the following values, and leave the Value Set blank:

� Technical Class, with a Window Prompt of Technical Class and a Columnof SEGMENT1.

� Technical Subclass, with a Window Prompt of Technical Subclass and aColumn of SEGMENT2.

8. Save your work.

9. Click Value Set. The Value Sets window displays.

10. Enter the Value Set Name as TECHNICAL_CLASS.

2-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 75: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

11. Description displays Technical Class.

12. Enter a Maximum Size of 8.

13. Choose Save and Proceed.

14. The TECHNICAL_SUB_CLASS Value Set Name displays.

15. Description displays Technical Subclass.

16. Enter a Maximum Size of 8.

17. Save your work.

18. The Segments Summary (Item Categories) - Technical Class & Subclasswindow displays the entries for Technical Class and Technical Subclass.

19. Find a Value Set of TECHNICAL_CLASS for Technical Class.

20. Find a Value Set of TECHNICAL_SUB_CLASS for Technical Subclass.

21. Save your work.

22. Return to the Key Flexfield Segments window to freeze the flexfielddefinitions.

23. Select Freeze Flexfield Definition. A Caution message displays to indicate thatflexfields can be unfrozen, but that doing so can cause problems once you haveentered data in the flexfield.

24. Click OK.

25. Click Compile to establish the flexfield structure. The following Note displays:

Compiling flexfield definition.

26. Click OK.

27. After compilation, a concurrent request is submitted to generate a flexfieldview. The following Note displays:

The flexfield was compiled successfully. Submitted request to generate flexfieldview...

28. Click OK.

29. Check completion of the concurrent program by viewing submitted requests.

30. Define Technical Class & Subclass values.

Setting Up 2-21

Page 76: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

�� To define Technical Class & Subclass values:1. Navigate to the Segment Values window.

2. Enter the following in the Find Key Flexfield Segments window:

� Enter Oracle Inventory as Application.

� Enter Item Categories as Title.

� Enter Technical Class & Subclass as the Name of the Structure created.

3. Click Find.

4. Query Technical Class as the Independent Segment.

5. Enter an appropriate Value, Translated Value, and Description for TechnicalClass. For example, enter:

� Binder as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

� Solvents as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

The values entered appear as allowable values for the Technical Class LOV.

6. Select Enabled.

7. Choose Save & Proceed.

8. Query Technical Subclass as the Independent Segment.

9. Enter an appropriate Value, Translated Value, and Description for TechnicalSubclass. For example, enter:

� Acrylic as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

� Alkyd as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

� Epoxy as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

� Organic as Value, Translated Value, and Description.

The values entered appear as allowable values for the Technical Subclass LOV.

10. Select Enabled.

�� To define Categories:1. Navigate to the Codes window. The Find Categories window displays.

2. Click New.

3. Enter Technical Class & Subclass.

2-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 77: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

4. Enter each Category multisegment flexfield structure to assign meaning to eachsegment. For example, enter:

� Binder.Acrylic for an acrylic binder.

� Binder.Alkyd for an alkyd binder.

� Binder.Epoxy for an epoxy binder.

5. Enter an appropriate Value for each Segment.

6. Click OK. Return to the Categories window.

7. Enter a unique Description for each Category. For example, Binder.Acryliccould have the Description Binder/Acrylic.

8. Save the window.

�� To define Category Sets:1. Navigate to the Category Sets window.

2. Select the appropriate Inventory Organization.

3. Click OK.

4. Enter a unique Name and Description for the Category Set. For example, enter:

� Technical Classification as Name.

� Component Technical Classification as Description.

5. Enter the Flex Structure created. For example, enter Technical Class & Subclass.

6. Verify that the Category Set is controlled at the Master Level. This lets youassign the same Category Value in all organizations where it is assigned.

7. Enter the Default Category. For example, enter Binder.Acrylic. The default isused when assigning an item to the Category Set.

8. Determine if you want to Enforce a List of Valid Categories:

� Select this check box if you want to assign items only to Categories definedas valid for the current Category Set. Enter each of the Valid Categories.

� Clear this check box if you want to assign an item to any Category that hasthe same flexfield structure as the current Category Set.

9. Click Assign. The Item Assignments (OPM) Technical Classification, MasterLevel window displays.

10. Query the Item you want to assign to the Category Set.

Setting Up 2-23

Page 78: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Technical Classes and Subclasses

11. Select the Category and enter the Segments.

12. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for each additional Item you want to assign.

13. Click Accept.

�� To assign Category Sets to a Process Manufacturing Class:1. Navigate to the OPM Category Sets window.

2. Select the Category Set for the appropriate Process Manufacturing Class. EnterTechnical Classification as Category Set.

3. Save the window.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Inventory Control User’s Guide

2-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 79: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

For

3

Formulas

This topic shows you how to define the formulas that drive your manufacturingprocess. It includes a basic understanding of formula setup. You are shown how toenter item technical data and use the laboratory spreadsheet. You are introduced tosetting up formula information including how to use formula phantoms, methodsavailable to scale formulas, and to find formulas. In addition to entering formuladetails, you are shown how to define and maintain formulas at the header and linelevels. Methods for determining where ingredients are used, the Indented Bill ofMaterials Report, and formula inquiry help you locate formula information rapidly.

The following topics provide a basic understanding of formulas:

� Understanding Formula Setup

� Requirements

� Solutions

� Entering Item Technical Data

� Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

� Setting Up Formula Information

� Using Formula Phantoms

� Scaling Formulas

� Defining and Maintaining Formulas

� Finding a Formula

� Displaying the Formula Summary

� Displaying the Formula Header Summary

� Entering Formula Details

mulas 3-1

Page 80: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� Displaying the Formula Product Summary

� Displaying the Formula Byproduct Summary

� Displaying the Formula Ingredient Summary

� Displaying a Summary of Formula Product Lines

� Editing Formula Product Lines

� Editing a Formula Product Line

� Displaying a Summary of Formula Byproduct Lines

� Editing Formula Byproduct Lines

� Editing a Formula Byproduct Line

� Displaying a Summary of Formula Ingredient Lines

� Editing Formula Ingredient Lines

� Editing a Formula Ingredient Line

� Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

� Using Formula Inquiry

� Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

� Analyzing a Formula

� Displaying Formula Analysis Results

� Finding a Formula Analysis

� Overriding Default Explosion Rules

3-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 81: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Formula Setup

Understanding Formula SetupThis topic explains how to define the formulas that drive your manufacturingprocess. Formulas are lists of ingredients and products with their associatedquantities and processing instructions. In some cases, you can refer to a formula as aprocess manufacturing bill of material. Production batches are based on formulasdefined in New Product Development. Formulas are also used for planning,managing costs, and scheduling.

Formulas are depicted hierarchically in the following diagram that shows the:

� Routing composed of a series of Operations organized in Steps.

� Operations composed of Activities containing Resources.

� Formula composed of Ingredient, Product, and possibly Byproduct.

� Recipe linking the Routing and Formula together with Processing Instructions.

Formulas 3-3

Page 82: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

RequirementsFollowing are some requirements that customers have for formulas in New ProductDevelopment. The answers are explained in detail in the Solutions topic.

Can multiple versions of a single product formula be managed at thesame time?Yes. Depending on how version control is implemented, a version number can beassigned to multiple versions of a single product formula.

Can the formula approval process be managed efficiently?Yes. Use the formula Status field to manage formula approvals quickly andefficiently. By activating the Status Approval Workflow the application manageseach step of the approval process with a minimal requirement for intervention.

Is there multilingual support for formulas?Yes. Use Description and Comments fields to enter translations for each of theinstalled languages.

Can both standard and packaging formulas be created?Yes. Use the Formula Details window to create both standard and packagingformulas. The window has a Packaging check box that identifies a formula as apackaging formula.

Can formulas from third party applications be imported into the NewProduct Development application?Yes. Use Formula APIs to create new formula headers and details from applicationsnot produced by Oracle. For existing Oracle applications migration scripts aresupplied.

Can a laboratory be set up for many product lines with differenttechnical characteristics?Yes. Use technical parameters that are specific to an organization to set upindividual product lines with differing technical characteristics.

3-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 83: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

Is it possible to predict the characteristics of a product based oningredient composition?Yes. Use the Laboratory Spreadsheet to model new formulas and predict formulacomposition based on individual components added.

Is it possible to model catalysts and starter cultures, or any other itemthat does not change batch size?Yes. Formulas ingredients can be scaled using rules that specify whether or not aningredient contributes to yield.

Can Standard Operating Procedures be linked to a specific process oringredient?Yes. Complete process instructions can be linked using text insertions andcomments at various stages of the formulation process.

Formulas 3-5

Page 84: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

SolutionsNew Product Development provides solutions to help resolve issues at every stageof the product development process. The following represent some of the keyperformance solutions for formulas.

Manage Multiple Versions of a Single Product Formula If Version Control is on, a changeto any component of a formula requires a new formula to be created consisting ofthe same formula name with a different version number. This is not required forstatus changes, Mark for Purge, or Undelete operations. If Version Control is off,any change to a formula can be made without requiring a new version. Copy aformula to a new version without the need to reenter information. Version Controlis only active when a formula is Approved for General Use. Version Control helpsmanage multiple versions of a single product formula.

Let Formula Status Indicate Formula Approval Use the Status field in each formula todetermine where the formula is in an approval cycle. Activate the Status ApprovalWorkflow to control the approval process. Workflow presents each Approver withan electronic notification so that action can be taken immediately. This expedites theoverall approval process.

Use the Description and Comments Text Fields for Multilingual Support for Formulas Twodescriptive text fields in the header of a formula allow entry of a formulaDescription and Comments for each of the installed languages. Text is displayed inthe session specific language.

Use the Formula Details Window to Create Both Standard Formulas and Packaging FormulasThe Formula Details window allows entry of the formula header and all itsproducts, ingredients, and byproducts. To set up a packaging formula, enter thepackaged item itself as product. Then enter the bulk item, packaging container, andpackage label as ingredients.

Bridge Collaborative Environments with Formula APIs To bridge collaborativeformulation environments, an integrated set of Applications ProgrammingInterfaces (APIs) such as legacy systems, spreadsheets, or third party systems.These Formula APIs create, reconcile or update formulas, their components, andtheir validity rules.

Define Technical Parameters for Rapid Calculations New Product Development allowssetup of technical parameters as quality control assays with character, numeric, listof values, Boolean, or weight percent formats. This can be done on an organization

3-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 85: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

specific basis. A technical parameter within an individual laboratory organizationcan be defined as percent solvent with each ingredient in a formula contributing adifferent portion of its weight to the product as solvent. New Product Developmentfinds the weight of solvent contributed by each individual ingredient, the sum ofthese contributions, and after determining the total formula weight, it calculates theratio of percent solvent for each product. The application enables technicalparameters to be defined in the appropriate units, and allows specification of theminimum and maximum number of significant figures to display. After establishinga formula for laboratory use, and entering its technical data for all appropriateingredients, the application displays technical parameters within the laboratoryformula to see how to roll it up into a recipe. It also enables use of experimentalitems for evaluation or testing purposes, and the recording of all information andtext as detailed notes or comments.

Simulate Formulas and Analyze Their Components The Laboratory Spreadsheetcalculates product technical parameters automatically, and enables simulation of thequantity and technical parameter values for all formula components. Formulatorscan rearrange and adjust quantities of the ingredients and byproducts. Thespreadsheet provides the ability to save formula variations as possible newproducts. This flexibility enables testing of different scenarios during reformulationand provides a rapid evaluation of the results.

Provide Comprehensive Formula and Ingredient Scalability New Product Developmentdelivers full manufacturing scalability. The amounts of material produced or usedby a formula can be scaled using methods that fix or vary each ingredient.Scalability provides production cycle flexibility and virtually eliminates the need torecalculate ingredient amounts manually.

Deliver Complete Formula Process Instructions New Product Development enablesformulators and process engineers to link new product formulation instructions toproduction management for use in the manufacturing process. This eliminates theneed to transfer information manually. It improves product quality and consistency.Instructions are defined in one or more languages at various levels of theorganization to meet quality requirements. This information supports compliance toISO 9000.

Formulas 3-7

Page 86: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Item Technical Data

Entering Item Technical DataOnce you have specified a sequence for technical parameters, you are ready to enterthe technical parameter data. The data represent technical parameter values foryour items.

Prerequisites� Set up technical parameters.

� Set up technical parameter sequences.

In most cases use Weight Percent, Volume Percent, Specific Gravity, Cost,Equivalent Weight, and Quantity per Unit for items that are raw materials orbyproducts.

Specifying the Set of technical parameters to UseWhen you enter an item that is a product of one or more laboratory formulas,specify the appropriate formula containing the Item Technical Data. Since the itemis a product in formulas, its technical parameter values are calculated from specificformulas. Calculated values can be different in each formula.

For example, suppose your company can make orange juice using either of twovalid formulas. Each formula uses a different orange juice concentrate. If you useorange juice to make an orange drink, verify that the technical parameter values areselected for the formula you decide to use, since calculated technical parametervalues can be different in each formula.

Entering Density for Raw MaterialsThe application uses the DENSITY technical parameter for unit of measureconversions. Make sure to enter values for this technical parameter for all your rawmaterials.

If you get a unit of measure conversion error on the spreadsheet, check that youentered density information for all of your raw materials.

Density values must be entered as a ratio between the base unit of measure for themass unit of measure type and the base unit of measure for the volume unit ofmeasure type.

The base unit of measure for each UOM type is the first unit of measure set up forthat UOM type. For example, if the base unit of measure for mass is kilograms andthe base unit of measure for volume is liters, enter the density in kilograms per literrather than pounds per gallon.

3-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 87: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Item Technical Data

You can determine the units of measure that are the base units for mass and volumeby entering an item specific UOM conversion between mass and volume on theItem Lot/Sublot Std Conversion window in the Inventory Control application. Theunits displayed beneath the word Conversion are the base units that are used formass and volume.

�� To enter item technical data:Calculated values for a product are not saved to the Item Technical Data table untilyou recall the formula on the Laboratory Spreadsheet and update technicalparameters from the Actions menu. These values are not visible and are notavailable for use in other formulas if that product is an ingredient in other formulas.

If you need to enter Item Technical Data for products, be aware that if yourecalculate those technical parameter values on the spreadsheet and updatetechnical parameters from the Actions menu, the data that you entered on the ItemTechnical Data window is overwritten.

To define technical data for items:

1. Navigate to the Item Technical Data window.

2. Enter the Laboratory organization where you are defining item technicalparameter data. You can enter data only for the technical parameters associatedwith this laboratory organization. Required.

3. Enter the Item code you are entering technical parameter data for. Required.

4. If you are entering technical parameter data for a specific lot, enter the Lot code.

5. If you are entering technical parameter data for a specific sublot, enter theSublot code.

6. Enter the Laboratory Formula. This field only displays if the item is a productin a formula.

7. Enter the Version number of the Laboratory Formula. This field only displays ifthe item is a product in a formula.

8. Item Unit of Measure displays the unit of measure for the item. You cannot editthis field.

Details9. The name of each technical Parameter defined for the laboratory organization

displays. You cannot edit these fields.

Formulas 3-9

Page 88: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Item Technical Data

10. Enter the Value for each technical parameter. You cannot enter or edit this fieldif the technical parameter value is calculated by the application.

For example, you cannot enter or edit this field if the Value is an Expression orif it is derived from a Quality Control assay.

The value you enter must satisfy the validation parameters displayed at thebottom of the window if entering a numeric value. Otherwise, the value mustbe in the LOV if the Validation List method is selected as the Data Type.

11. Displays the Unit of measure for the technical parameter. Specific gravity andequivalent weight use the units of measure set up on the Unit of Measurewindow in the OPM System Administration application. All other technicalparameters use the units of measure set up on the Units window in the QualityControl application. With the exception of equivalent weight, this unit ofmeasure is not used in any calculations.

12. The Quality Control check box displays:

� If the check box is selected, the Value for a technical parameter comes froma Quality Control assay.

� If the check box is cleared, the Value for a technical parameter does notcome from a Quality Control assay.

13. The Data Type displays. You cannot edit this field.

14. The Calculate check box displays:

� If the check box is selected, the Value for a technical parameter is calculatedby the application.

� If the check box cleared, the Value for a technical parameter is notcalculated by the application.

15. The selected technical parameter Range displays.

16. The number of Significant Digits for the Value displays.

17. Save the window.

3-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 89: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

Using the Laboratory SpreadsheetThe Laboratory Spreadsheet displays each ingredient, product, and byproduct in aformula with the quantity and technical parameter values for each. The LaboratorySpreadsheet lets you manage ingredients and byproducts, and the quantities andtechnical parameter values for each ingredient and byproduct. Technical parametervalues for the product are only calculated for the first product in a formula.

Use the Laboratory Spreadsheet to display and edit laboratory formulas and theTechnical parameter values of the items in the formula, and to display the effectsthat changes to ingredient values have on the product values.

Making changes to a formula on the spreadsheet does not change that formula as itis stored in the database. If you make changes to the items or the item quantities onthe spreadsheet, and later retrieve the formula on the Formula Details window, youdo not see the changes you have made. This is true even if you saved thespreadsheet. This prevents you from accidentally making permanent changes to alaboratory formula based on scenarios you investigate on the spreadsheet.

�� To navigate in the laboratory spreadsheet:After you enter the laboratory formula and formula version that you want todisplay, the cursor is placed in the Ingredients panel. You can navigate to and fromthe Ingredients panel and the Technical Parameters panel by pressing Tab, or youcan click the appropriate field.

When you enter the Laboratory Spreadsheet, the Products region is displayedfollowing the Ingredients panel.

You can display each region with its appropriate information:

� Products displays the Item, Quantity, and Unit of Measure for each product.Technical parameters are displayed to the right of each product.

� By-products displays the Item, Quantity, and Unit of Measure for eachbyproduct. Technical parameters are displayed to the right of each byproduct.

� Extended Information displays the description of the ingredient on the linewhere the cursor is positioned. If the cursor is positioned on a Technicalparameter calculated from an expression, the expression is displayed followingthe ingredient description.

�� To edit laboratory formulas on a spreadsheet:1. Navigate to the Laboratory Spreadsheet window.

Formulas 3-11

Page 90: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

2. The first set of Technical Parameters displays. Display additional technicalparameters as follows:

� Click Next to display the next series of technical parameters.

� Click Previous to display a previously shown set of technical parametersthat are not currently displayed.

� Click Recalculate to recalculate the values displayed on the LaboratorySpreadsheet.

3. The organization for the current Laboratory displays. You cannot edit this field.

4. Enter the Formula code that you want to calculate on the spreadsheet.

5. Enter the Formula Version that you want to calculate on the spreadsheet. ADescription of Formula and version displays. The Description field allowsmultilingual entries.

Ingredients6. The following fields are displayed and can be edited:

� Item code displays for each ingredient. You can add, change, or delete theseingredients.

� Quantity displays for each Item. You can edit these quantities ifappropriate.

� UOM for the Quantity displays. You can edit the unit of measure.

� Columns labeled with names for each technical parameter display. Thevalue of each technical parameter for each item is displayed.

7. If you change the technical parameter values for ingredients, click Recalculateto assess the effect on each of the listed ingredient technical parameters.

Products8. The product Item code displays.

9. The Quantity of the product displays.

10. The UOM for the Quantity displays. technical parameter values for the productare displayed.

By-products11. The byproduct Item code displays.

3-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 91: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

12. The Quantity of the byproduct item displays.

13. The UOM for the Quantity displays. Byproduct technical parameter values aredisplayed.

Extended Information14. A Description of the ingredient displays on the selected line.

15. An Expression used to calculate the technical parameter value displays. If anexpression is used to calculate the technical parameter value, the cursor must bein the column for an Expression type parameter in order to display thatExpression.

16. Save the window.

�� To list experimental items:1. Select the List Experimental Items check box.

2. Click Recalculate.

Saving a SpreadsheetSave spreadsheets that you can use for comparison purposes.

�� To save a spreadsheet:1. Select Save Spreadsheet from the Actions menu.

2. Enter a Name for the Spreadsheet you want to save.

3. Click OK.

Retrieving a SpreadsheetRetrieve spreadsheets of comparisons.

�� To retrieve a spreadsheet:1. Select Retrieve Spreadsheet from the Actions menu.

2. Enter a Name for the Spreadsheet you want to retrieve.

3. Click OK.

Formulas 3-13

Page 92: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

Displaying Calculation ErrorsDisplay calculation errors for a product, ingredient, or byproduct.

�� To display calculation errors:1. Choose Display Calculation Errors from the Actions menu.

2. Select one of the following:

� Product to display product calculation errors.

� Ingredient to display ingredient calculation errors.

� By-product to display byproduct calculation errors.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Type determines whether the error displayed is for the product, ingredient,or byproduct.

� Item determines whether the technical parameter calculation error is for aproduct, ingredient, or byproduct.

� Technical Parameter displays the code of the technical parameter where anerror occurred.

� Error Code determines a description the calculation error.

� Expression determines the place where the error occurred. A carat (^)points to the approximate location where the error occurred.

4. Click OK.

�� To update a formula:If you make spreadsheet changes, save the spreadsheet, exit, and then retrieve thespreadsheet for the formula you changed, the changes you made are visible on theLaboratory Spreadsheet window, however the formula itself is not updated withthose changes.

You can use the Update Formula command if you want the formula changes youmake on the spreadsheet to be saved to the formula in the database.

1. Begin with the appropriate changes displayed on the spreadsheet.

2. Choose Update Formula from the Actions menu.

3. Save the spreadsheet.

3-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 93: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Laboratory Spreadsheet

�� To update technical parameters:Select update technical parameters before you exit the spreadsheet. If you makechanges on the spreadsheet, save it, exit, and then retrieve the spreadsheet for theformula, even though the changes you made are visible on the LaboratorySpreadsheet window, the formula is not be updated with those changes when youselect Update Technical Parameters.

You can use the Update Technical Parameters command if you want the formulachanges you make on the spreadsheet to be saved to the formula in the database.

1. Begin with the appropriate changes displayed on the spreadsheet.

2. Choose Update Technical Parameters from the Actions menu.

3. Save the spreadsheet.

�� To interpret spreadsheet calculation errors:For technical parameters that are calculated from expressions, the LaboratorySpreadsheet displays a string of question marks (?) or asterisks (*) if the applicationcannot calculate a value.

A string of question marks indicates that a compilation error occurred For example,the value of a variable used in the expression could not be found, or the syntax ofthe expression is incorrect.

A string of asterisks indicates that the expression could not be calculated formathematical reasons. For example, division by zero. To display additionalinformation, select Calculation Errors from the Actions menu.

Formulas 3-15

Page 94: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Formula Information

Setting Up Formula Information

Setting Up Header InformationTo create a new formula, enter formula header information including formulaname, version, and product on the Formula Details window. Formula headerinformation is that information that applies to the entire formula. The FormulaHeader Summary window lists all formula header information entered.

Setting Up Product and Coproduct InformationUse the Formula Product Lines window to enter each product or coproductcomponent. For example, skim milk is a coproduct in the production of cream.

Setting Up Ingredient InformationUse the Formula Ingredient Lines window to enter each ingredient component.

Setting Up Byproduct InformationIf skim milk were further processed into a fat free cottage cheese product, you couldconsider the liquid whey as a byproduct. You do not plan for byproducts, but theymust be accounted for in the formula.

If the formula produces byproducts, enter these byproducts and their respectivequantities on the Formula Details window. Byproducts, like products andcoproducts, are items produced by a formula. They differ from products in that youdo not plan your production to make byproducts. For example, in the production ofapplesauce you produce apple peels. These peels are not something you plan tomanufacture as a product. You would never schedule a batch in order to produceapple peels. Depending on the facility, however, these peels can have no monetaryvalue and can require disposal, or they can be sold as raw material for apple cidervinegar. In either case, enter apple peels as a byproduct of your applesauce formula.

OPM does not calculate the cost of production of byproducts. Any items producedby formulas that you want to calculate costs for must be entered as products. Theymust not be entered as byproducts.

Adding Text to a FormulaAdd text to a formula by selecting Edit Text from the Actions menu. You can do thisat the header or line level. Text that is associated with a formula is copied to batchesthat are based on the formula if the GME: Copy Formula Text profile option is set to1.

3-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 95: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Setting Up Formula Information

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing System Administration User’s Guide

Formulas 3-17

Page 96: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using Formula Phantoms

Using Formula PhantomsPhantoms are intermediate formulas that are not manufactured as products. Sincephantoms are intermediates, they are sometimes referred to as transientsubassemblies.

You enter phantoms as formula ingredients, and then explode them when you enterbatch tickets. Phantom functionality is a fixed method of multibatch management.Once several batches are linked by a production order number and phantom typedependency, you can manage them as a single production event. There are twofundamental tasks associated with using phantoms:

� Identify one or more ingredients in a formula as phantoms. Use the PhantomType field to indicate that an item is a phantom.

� Build a formula for each phantom. The method for building a formula thatgenerates a phantom is the same method used to build a formula for a regularbatch. However, the formula ingredient must be defined as a phantom.

There are two types of phantoms:

� Automatic Generation type creates phantom batches automatically. When youuse this function with automatic document numbering, the applicationautomatically creates a dependent phantom batch, and then generates aproduction identification number to associate all related batches.

� Manual Generation type requires manual intervention to create phantombatches. When you use manual generation, you need to explode each phantomingredient by selecting the Phantom. When you release a production batch thathas phantoms in its formula, a message displays to indicate that the phantomhas not been exploded. This advice is given for one of two reasons:

� It is a manual phantom that you need to explode.

� There is some problem with the phantom.

Phantoms You MakeYou use a basic bread dough for a number of kinds of bread. You do not sell it orkeep it in inventory, however you need to track its ingredients. Your formulas forbread contain #BASICBREAD plus whatever other ingredients are needed to turnplain white bread into other kinds of bread such as rye, whole wheat, andpumpernickel.

In this case, you need only one version of the #BASICBREAD formula.

3-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 97: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using Formula Phantoms

Phantoms You Never Actually MakeYou make a number of products that use apples. Each product has a differentformula, but all of them use apples. And, there are many varieties of apples. Flavor,texture, and sugar content vary significantly among these apple varieties. Price andavailability can vary depending on season or other factors. Therefore, you decide touse an intermediate called #APPLEBLEND that is made up of two or more applevarieties. You do not actually make #APPLEBLEND. However, you use itsingredients in a batch.

Formulas 3-19

Page 98: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

Scaling FormulasYou can scale formulas up or down by input or by output:

� If the formula input ingredients are scaled, a specific scaling factor is applied toall scalable ingredients. A calculated output scale factor is applied to all scalableoutputs.

� If the formula outputs are scaled, a factor is applied to all scalable outputs. Acalculated input scale factor is applied to all scalable ingredients.

In order for this approach to be successful, you need to specify whether thequantities of each item in the formula are fixed or scalable.

Proportional scaling is the least complex scaling type since the given and calculatedfactors are applied appropriately to the scalable item inputs or outputs. In order toscale formulas properly, specify whether the ingredients need to be increased usingfixed or proportional scaling.

Scale Type DefinitionsThe quantities of items which are fixed scale are not altered when a formula isscaled. For example, if a formula has a fixed scale ingredient with a quantity of 10kg and the formula is scaled by a factor of two, then the quantity remains fixed at 10kg.

Items that are proportionally scaled have their quantities changed when a formulais scaled up or down. With proportional scaling, the scaling is continuous in that thescaled quantities can contain decimals. Proportionally scaled items may or may notcontribute to yield.

While proportional scaling makes sense for many items in process industries, itdoes not make sense for all items.

The following lists the types of formula scaling available in New ProductDevelopment:

� Type 0 is Fixed scaling.

� Type 1 is Proportional scaling.

� Type 2 is Integer scaling.

The following lists the Contribute to Yield types available in New ProductDevelopment:

� Yes indicates that an ingredient contributes to yield.

� No indicates that an ingredient does not contribute to yield.

3-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 99: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

Understanding Scale Type RulesThe following summarizes the business rules in effect for scale types:

� The Contribute to Yield type for:

– Products and byproducts is always set to Yes.

– Ingredients can be set to Yes or No.

� Products and byproducts cannot have an Integer scale type.

� Ingredients are assigned a scale type of Fixed, Proportional, or Integer.

� If an ingredient is assigned a scale type of Integer, then it must also beassigned a:

– Scale Multiple, to specify the multiple in which the ingredient can be usedin a formula. For example, a Scale Multiple of 30 indicates the ingredient isused in quantities of 30, 60, or 90, and so forth.

– Rounding Variance, to specify an acceptable percent deviation up or downfrom the calculated ingredient quantity.

– Rounding Direction, to specify whether the quantity of material must berounded up to the next higher scale multiple of material, down to the nextlowest scale multiple of material, or if the material can be rounded up ordown. If the material can be rounded up or down, then it is rounded to thenearest multiple.

Fixed ScaleTo scale a formula with fixed scale items, the application must convert thequantities of ingredients, products, and byproducts to a common unit of measure.The unit of measure used for this calculation is the base unit of measure specifiedby the GMD: Yield Type profile option. This is usually mass. All items in theformula that contribute to yield must be convertible to this unit of measure.

If the formula contains fixed quantity ingredients that contribute to yield, then thescalable ingredients are scaled by an amount necessary to produce the new productquantity, not by the percent entered as the scale factor. If all products are set to fixedquantity, then no quantities in the formula are changed.

Fixed Scale With Yield Contribution The quantities of items for this scale type arenot altered when a formula or batch step is scaled. If a formula has a fixed scaleingredient with a quantity of 2000 kg and the formula output is scaled by a factor of2, then the quantity remains fixed at 2000 kg.

Formulas 3-21

Page 100: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

These quantities are taken into account when calculating the factor to apply to thescalable ingredients so that the yield ratio is preserved. In the example that follows,the ratio is 115:120 before scaling and 230:240 after scaling the output by a factor of2.

Fixed Scale Without Yield Contribution The quantities of items for this scale typeare also not altered when a formula is scaled. This is the same as the previousexample, however the item quantities are not considered when scaling theremaining ingredients. These quantities have no effect on scaling at all. Forexample, in the following, formula Ingredient C is fixed scale without yieldcontribution. If the product is scaled by a factor of 2, then the quantities after scalingappear as if ingredient C were not included.

See: Oracle Process Manufacturing Inventory Management User’s Guide

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product A 11500 kg 23000 kg

Ingredient A, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 11000 kg

Ingredient B, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 11000 kg

Ingredient C, Fixed and Contributing 2000 kg 2000 kg

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product A 10000 kg 20000 kg

Ingredient A, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 10000 kg

Ingredient B, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 10000 kg

Ingredient C, Fixed and Noncontributing 2000 kg 2000 kg

3-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 101: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

Proportional ScaleIf the formula contains proportionally scalable ingredients, then the scalableingredients are increased in a direct ratio to produce the new product quantity. Inthe following example, Product A is proportionally scaled from 10000 kg to 20000kg.

With proportional scaling, Ingredient A and Ingredient B are multiplied by a factorof 2.

Examples of Single and Mixed Scale TypesThe following discussion compares different scale types:

Single Type Scaling If a formula consists solely of proportionally scalable items,then scaling the output or the input scales everything in the same ratio. It is alsopossible to construct a formula from items that are all fixed scale. This formula isineligible for scaling.

Mixed Type Scaling: Fixed and Proportional With Yield Contribution If a formulacontains both fixed and proportionally scaled items, then the factor applied to thescalable quantities is not the same as the overall scaling factor. Consider a formulathat yields 3000 kg of scalable product by converting 1000 kg of fixed scaleIngredient 1 and 2000 kg of scalable Ingredient 2. If the product is scaled by a factorof 2 to produce 6000 kg, then 5000 kg of Ingredient 2 is required, not 4000 kg. Thefactor applied to the Ingredient 2 quantity is therefore 2.5 rather than 2. If the inputsare scaled by a factor of 2, then the output is 5000 kg, or 2 times 2000 kg ofIngredient 2 plus 1000 kg of Ingredient 1. The yield of the product is scaled by afactor of 1.667 rather than by a factor of 2, as shown in the following:

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product A 10000 kg 20000 kg

Ingredient A, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 10000 kg

Ingredient B, Proportional Scaling 5000 kg 10000 kg

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product B 3000 kg 6000 kg

Ingredient 1 Fixed and Contributing 1000 kg 1000 kg

Ingredient 2 Proportional Scaling 2000 kg 5000 kg

Formulas 3-23

Page 102: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

Mixed Type Scaling: Proportional With Yield Contribution and Fixed Without YieldContribution If the fixed quantity of an ingredient has no effect on yield, then theyield contribution field must indicate this. When a fixed quantity item that does notcontribute to yield is encountered by the scaling algorithms, the item quantity is notscaled, and is ignored when deriving the scale factor to apply to the remainingitems. The formula is treated as consisting only of the remaining items.

If a formula is scaled so that 2000 kg of scalable product is made by converting 2000kg of scalable Ingredient 1 in the presence of 1000 kg of fixed scale Ingredient 2 thatdoes not contribute to the yield, then the output doubles. Scaling the inputs by afactor of 2 doubles the output quantity, since the fixed scale ingredient quantity isnot to be changed. It does not matter if 100 kg of Ingredient 2 is used. The same istrue when outputs are scaled.

Understanding Integer ScalingSome material in process industries is picked from inventory in eaches, such as a 30pound bag of defoamant or a box of antistatic sheets. If an item is issued in 30pound bags, then it is supplied in full bags and managed on the production floorappropriately. If the UOM used in the formula is the bag, then you must scale inwhole integer increments. If you want to express the ingredient in pounds, theninteger scaling is not sufficient. You need a way to specify that the ingredient mustonly be scaled in multiples of 30 pounds.

When materials are scaled by a multiple, a scaling direction and a roundingvariation value need to be specified so that the scaled quantity is rounded properly.Scaling by a multiple results in ingredients being rounded up or down to the nextwhole multiple specified for the item in the formula. It is possible that the formulaingredient is not scaled as a result of not meeting the criteria to round up or down.

Examples of Integer ScalingWhen the Integer scale type is selected, specify the Scale Multiple, RoundingVariance, and Rounding Direction. In the following example, Product C is scaled upby 60 percent.

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product C 2000 kg 4000 kg

Ingredient 1 Proportional Scaling 2000 kg 4000 kg

Ingredient 2 Fixed and Noncontributing 1000 kg 1000 kg

3-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 103: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

Simple Integer Scaling The following is a simple example of using the Integerscale type with directional rounding:

Ingredient 2 has a Formula Quantity of 1 pallet with the following specifications:

� Scale Multiple = 1

� Rounding Variance = 100 percent

� Rounding Direction = Either

Since it is not possible to use 2.5 pallets, the Integer scale type rounds therequirement up to 3 pallets.

Complex Integer Scaling The following example is a more complex example ofusing the Integer scale type with directional rounding:

Ingredient 2 has a Formula Quantity of 25 kg with the following specifications:

� Scale Multiple = 25 kg

� Rounding Variance = 30 percent of the Formula Quantity After Scaling. This is0.3 of 40 kg, or up to 12 kg

� Rounding Direction = Down

The decision is whether to use 25 kg or 50 kg of material to produce Product C,since Ingredient 3 is only dispensed in multiples of 25 kg. The differences betweenthe required Formula Quantity and the Integer is 10 kg for the Up RoundingDirection, and 15 kg for the Down Rounding Direction. The Down RoundingDirection is calculated as follows:

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product Pkg1 1000 kg 2500 kg

Ingredient 1 Proportional Scaling 1000 kg 2500 kg

Ingredient 2 Integer 1 pallet 3 pallets

Item Formula Quantity Quantity After Scaling

Product C 2000 kg 3200 kg

Ingredient 1 Proportional Scaling 2000 kg 3200 kg

Ingredient 2 Integer 25 kg 40 kg

Formulas 3-25

Page 104: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

� Lower Scale Multiple - Quality After Scaling

= 25 - 40

= -15 kg for the Down Rounding Direction

Take the absolute value of any negative Rounding Direction. In this case thelower Rounding Direction has an absolute value of 15 kg.

The acceptable Rounding Variance is up to 12 kg. The Rounding Direction is Down,and the calculated absolute value for the down Rounding Direction is 15 kg,representing 3 kg more than the acceptable Rounding Variance. It is not acceptableto round down to 25 kg, so 40 kg of Ingredient 3 must be used in the formula.

If the Rounding Direction were Up, then it is acceptable to use 50 kg of Ingredient 3,since a 10 kg difference is less than the acceptable Rounding Variance of 12 kg. TheUp Rounding Direction is calculated as follows:

� Upper Scale Multiple - Quantity After Scaling

= 50 - 40

= 10 kg for the Up Rounding Direction.

Limitations for Repeated Scaling of an Integer Scaled ItemScaling issues occur when an item with an Integer scale type is scaled more thanonce during the production cycle. Repeated scaling items by the integer scale type isa process production issue.

See: Oracle Process Manufacturing Process Execution User’s Guide

Disabling the Scaling of a Previously Scaled FormulaThis advice applies to the Formula Details window.

If you clear Scaling Allowed so that scaling is not allowed on a formula, then thefollowing message displays:

Unchecking 'Scaling Allowed' for this formula will change the scale type for allmaterial lines to fixed. The minimum, maximum, and standard quantities forany existing validity rules will be changed to the product quantity in theformula.

Do you wish to Continue?

If you click OK, then the associated validity rule quantities are updated anddisabled, and all material line scale types are set to Fixed. If validity rules exist with

3-26 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 105: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

a status of Pending, Frozen, or On Hold, then the formula cannot be updated, andan appropriate message displays:

Validity Rules exist which require update due to the change in this formula'sscale type. However, they can not be updated because of their current status.Please update VR status in order to save this record.

If you do not continue after clearing Scaling Allowed, then the formula is set back toallow scaling, and all material detail line scale types remain unchanged andenabled.

Changing the Scale Type of a Product Line to the Fixed Scale TypeThis advice applies to the following windows:

� Formula Details

� Formula Product Lines

� Formula Product Line Edit

If you change the Scale Type of a product line to the Fixed scale type, then thefollowing message displays:

The minimum, maximum, and standard quantities of any existing validity ruleswill be changed to the product quantity in the formula. Do you wish tocontinue?

If you click OK, then the associated validity rule quantities are updated anddisabled, and all material line scale types are set to Fixed. If validity rules exist witha status of Pending, Frozen, or On Hold, then the formula cannot be updated, andan appropriate message displays:

Validity Rules exist which require update due to the change in this formula'sscale type. However, they can not be updated because of their current status.Please update VR status in order to save this record.

This advice applies to the following windows:

� Recipe Validity Rules

� Recipe Organization Details

When you display these windows after an associated formula header had its scalingset to Fixed, then all quantities are disabled. If the associated formula headerallowed scaling, but the product line did not, then the associated validity rules forthat product are disabled.

Formulas 3-27

Page 106: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Scaling Formulas

If you create a new record from any of these windows, and either the associatedformula header or product record is set to fixed scaling, then the quantities are setequal to the product quantity and unit of measure of the formula. Quantities aredisabled after entry if formula header or product are set to fixed scaling.

3-28 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 107: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Formulas

Defining and Maintaining FormulasFormulas are statements of ingredient requirements. A formula can includeprocessing instructions and ingredient sequencing directions. The formula can alsospecify the quantities of each item.

Creating a New FormulaCreate and define new formulas on the Formula Details window. Specify formulaheader information and each of the products, ingredients, and byproducts includedin the formula. You can display the following windows from the Formula Detailswindow:

� Formula Product Lines

� Formula Product Line Edit

� Formula By-Product Lines

� Formula Ingredient Lines

Maintaining Formulas at the Formula Header LevelUse the following windows to maintain formulas at the header level:

� Formula Summary By... to display a list of defined formulas with theirindividual version numbers and descriptions. These can be displayed by Class,Status, Owner, Laboratory, Product, or Plant. You can display the FormulaDetails window from the Formula Summary By... window.

� Formula Header Summary to display important descriptive information on aspecific formula. You can display the following windows from the FormulaHeader Summary window:

� Formula Details

� Formula Product Lines

� Formula By-Product Lines

� Formula Ingredient Lines

� Formula Product Summary to display a summary of all formula products. Youcan display the following windows from the Formula Product Summarywindow:

� Formula Product Lines

� Formula Product Line Edit

Formulas 3-29

Page 108: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Formulas

� Formula Product Lines to display individual formula product lines. You candisplay the Formula Product Line Edit window from the Formula Product Lineswindow.

� Formula By-Product Summary to display a summary of all formula byproducts.You can display the following windows from the Formula By-ProductSummary window:

� Formula By-Product Lines

� Formula By-Product Line Edit

� Formula By-Product Lines to display individual formula byproduct lines. Youcan display the Formula By-Product Line Edit window from the FormulaBy-Product Lines window.

� Formula Ingredient Summary to display a summary of all formula ingredients.You can display the following windows from the Formula Ingredient Summarywindow:

� Formula Ingredient Lines

� Formula Ingredient Line Edit

� Formula Ingredient Lines to display individual formula ingredient lines. Youcan display the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window from the FormulaIngredient Lines window.

3-30 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 109: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Formulas

The following graphic depicts the previously described formula navigation flowfrom the Formulas node and from the Products, By-Products and Ingredients nodes:

Maintaining Formulas at the Line Level

Use the following windows to maintain formulas at product, byproduct, andingredient line level:

� Formula Product Line Summary to display a summary of the individualformula product lines, with an item number and unit of measure associatedwith each line. You can display the Formula Product Line Edit from theFormula Product Line Summary window.

� Formula Product Line Edit to edit individual lines in the Formula Product LineSummary.

� Formula By-Product Line Summary to display a summary of the individualformula byproduct lines, with an item number and unit of measure associatedwith each line. You can display the Formula By-Product Line Edit window fromthe Formula By-Product Line Summary window:

� Formula By-Product Line Edit to edit individual lines in the FormulaBy-Product Line Summary.

Formulas 3-31

Page 110: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Formulas

� Formula Ingredient Line Summary to display a summary of the individualformula ingredient lines, with an item number and unit of measure associatedwith each line. You can display the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window fromthe Formula Ingredient Line Summary window.

� Formula Ingredient Line Edit to edit individual lines in the Formula IngredientLine Summary.

The following graphic depicts the previously described formula navigation flowfrom an individual product node (PROD 1), byproduct node (BY-PROD1), andingredient node (INGR1).

Creating a Packaging FormulaIn addition to defining the way bulk items are produced, formulas can be used todefine the way items are packaged. To set up a packaging formula, enter thepackaged item itself as product. Then enter the bulk item, packaging container, andpackage label as ingredients.

Migrating Formulas from Another ApplicationUse the Oracle Process Manufacturing Formula API to migrate formulas to thecurrent release.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Formula API User’s Guide

3-32 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 111: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Finding a Formula

Finding a FormulaThe Find Formulas window enables you to find a specific formula.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To find a formula:1. Navigate to the Find Formulas window.

2. Enter as many parameters as needed to complete the search:

� Enter search parameters in the Standard region for: Formula, Version,Description, Class, Product, or Ingredient.

� Enter search parameters in the Advanced region to enter a specific: Item,Condition, or Value.

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of the search.

5. Close the window.

Formulas 3-33

Page 112: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Summary

Displaying the Formula SummaryThe Formula Summary window presents a list of formulas associated with the ViewBy... option selected. The window displays individual versions and a briefdescription of the formula, and can be viewed by Class, Status, Owner, Laboratory,Product, or Plant.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save formula classes.

� Enter and save formulas.

� Use the View By list to select how you want to view the summary of formulas.Select one of the following:

� Class to display the list by formula class.

� Status to display the list by formula status.

� Owner to display the list by formula owner.

� Laboratory to display the list by laboratory.

� Product to display the list by primary product.

� Plant to display the list by plant.

�� To display a list of all defined formulas:1. Navigate to the Formula Summary By... window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Formula determines the code assigned to the formula.

� Version determines the version of the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the Formula.

� Product determines the primary product associated with the Formula.

� Quantity determines the amount of material associated with the Formula.

� UOM determines the primary unit of measure for the material associatedwith the Formula.

3-34 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 113: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Summary

3. Click Details to display the Formula Details window.

4. Close the window.

Formulas 3-35

Page 114: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Header Summary

Displaying the Formula Header SummaryThe Formula Header Summary window displays important descriptive headerinformation on a specific formula.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save formula classes.

� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display a summary of formula headers:1. Navigate to the Formula Header Summary window.

2. Select the appropriate Formula.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Status determines the status of the Formula.

� Formula determines the code assigned to the formula.

� Version determines the version of the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the Formula.

� Comments determines the remarks or notes entered for the Formula.

� Class determines an optional classification assigned to the Formula.

� Class Description determines an optional classification descriptionassigned to the Formula.

� Main Product determines the end item for the listed Formula.

� Product Description displays a description Main Product.

� Owner determines a code for the owner of the Formula.

� Owner Name determines the complete name of the Owner of the Formula.

� The Scaling Allowed check box indicates whether or not the Formulaallows scaling. If the check box is selected, scaling is allowed. Refer to the"Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� The Packaging check box indicates whether or not the Formula is apackaging type. If the check box is selected, the Formula is a packagingformula.

3-36 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 115: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Header Summary

4. Click Products to display the Formula Product Line Summary window. Drilldown to individual formula product lines on the Formula Product Line Editwindow.

5. Click By-products to display the Formula By-Product Line Summary window.Drill down to individual formula byproduct lines on the Formula By-ProductLine Edit window.

6. Click Ingredients to display the Formula Ingredient Line Summary window.Drill down to individual formula ingredient lines on the Formula:IngredientLine Edit window.

7. Click Details to display the Formula Details window.

8. Close the window.

Formulas 3-37

Page 116: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

Entering Formula DetailsThe Formula Details window lets you enter the details for a specific formula. Whencreating a new formula on the Formula Details window, the LOV for the Formulafield enables you to select or query the product from the item master. When youselect a product name to use as a formula name, the formula Description field hasthe item description entered automatically. The product UOM and productdescription continue to be entered automatically. For automatic product anddescription entry, you must select a valid item. If the item description changessubsequently, the formula description does not change. It must be updatedmanually. When you modify formula details, you cannot delete the last remainingproduct or ingredient in a formula.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save formula classes.

To enter formula details:1. Navigate to the Formula Details window.

2. Enter the code for the Formula. Required.

3. Enter the Formula Version. Required.

4. After entering all relevant information and saving the Formula with the defaultStatus of New, return to this window if you need to change Formula Status byselecting Change Status from the Actions menu. Depending on whetherWorkflow is enabled, a different set of statuses is available.

Select a Status for the Formula you are entering from one of the following:

� Approved for Laboratory Use to indicate that the Formula is approved forlaboratory use.

� Approved for General Use to indicate that the Formula is approved for usein production.

� Obsolete/Archived to indicate that the Formula is no longer approved foruse and is obsoleted, archived, or both.

If Workflow is enabled, when you select:

3-38 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 117: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

� Approved for Laboratory Use, Status changes to Request Approval forLaboratory Use until all approvers have accepted the Formula, then itsStatus changes to Approved for Laboratory Use.

� Approval for General Use, Status changes to Request Approval forGeneral Use until all approvers have accepted the Formula, then its Statuschanges to Approved for General Use.

Refer to the Understanding the Status Approval Workflow topic for additionalinformation.

5. Enter a Description that briefly explains the Formula. Required.

6. Enter Comments that need to accompany this Formula. For example, you couldenter CUSTOM PROPRIETARY FORMULA. DO NOT COPY. This field alsoallows multilingual entries.

7. Enter a Class for the Formula to identify how it is categorized. The ClassDescription assigned to the Formula displays.

8. Organization displays the name of the organization responsible for theFormula. The Organization Description assigned to the organization displays.

9. Enter the Owner of the Formula. The Owner Description displays.

10. The Scaling Allowed check box indicates whether or not the Formula allowsscaling.

� Select the check box to indicate that scaling is allowed.

� Clear the check box to indicate that scaling is not allowed.

Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

11. The Packaging check box indicates whether or not the Formula is a packagingformula.

� Select the check box to indicate that the Formula is a packaging formula.

� Clear the check box to indicate that the Formula is not a packaging formula.

Products12. The Line number for each product listed displays. These fields cannot be

edited.

13. Enter the Product code for each item produced by this Formula. If the formulacode you entered is the same as an item code, then that item code is displayedas the default in this field. Required.

Formulas 3-39

Page 118: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

14. The Description of the Product entered displays. This defaults from the ItemMaster table.

15. Enter Quantity of the Product that this Formula yields. The quantity entered inthis field is the default standard quantity used for the recipe. Required.

16. Enter the UOM for the Quantity entered. The inventory unit of measure for theitem is the default. If you enter a different unit of measure, set up a unit ofmeasure conversion between the default and the unit of measure you decide toenter. Conversions between units of measure of the same unit of measure typeare defined when the unit of measure is defined in System Administration.Conversions between different unit of measure types must be defined for eachitem on the Item Lot/Sublot Standard Conversion window in InventoryManagement. Required.

17. Select the Scale Type as:

� Fixed if the product is not scalable.

� Proportional if the product is scalable.

Required. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

18. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

19. Contribute to Step Qty indicates whether the Line contributes to the stepquantity:

� Select Yes if the Line contributes to step quantity.

� Select No if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

Required.

20. Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

21. Click Edit Line to display the Formula Product Line Edit window.

22. Click Products to display the Formula Product Lines window.

23. Click By-Products to display the Formula By-Product Lines window.

3-40 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 119: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

24. Click Ingredients to display the Formula Ingredient Lines window.

By-Products25. The Line number for each By-Product listed displays. This field cannot be

edited.

26. Enter the By-Product code for each item produced by this Formula. If theformula code you entered is the same as an item code, then that item codedisplays as the default in this field. Required if you enter one or more formulabyproducts. Required.

27. The Description of the By-Product entered displays. This defaults from the ItemMaster table.

28. Enter the Quantity of the By-Product that this Formula yields. The quantityentered in this field is the default standard quantity used for the recipe. It canbe changed at the recipe level. Required if you enter one or more By-Productsfor the Formula. Required.

29. Enter the UOM for the Quantity entered. The inventory unit of measure for theItem is the default. If you enter a different unit of measure, set up a unit ofmeasure conversion between the default and the unit of measure you decide toenter. Conversions between units of measure of the same unit of measure type(for example, both mass) are defined when the unit of measure is defined inSystem Administration. Conversions between different unit of measure typesmust be defined for each item on the Item Lot/Sublot Standard Conversionwindow in Inventory Management. Required if you enter one or moreBy-Products for the Formula. Required.

30. Select the Scale Type as:

� Fixed if the byproduct is not scalable.

� Proportional if the byproduct is scalable.

Required. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

31. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

Formulas 3-41

Page 120: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

32. Contribute to Step Qty indicates whether the Line contributes to the stepquantity.

� Select Yes if the Line contributes to step quantity.

� Select No if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

Required.

33. Click Edit Line to display the Formula By-Product Line Edit window.

34. Click Products to display the Formula Product Lines window.

35. Click By-Products to display the Formula By-Product Lines window.

36. Click Ingredients to display the Formula Ingredient Lines window.

Ingredients37. The Line number for each ingredient listed displays. This field cannot be

edited.

38. Enter the Ingredient code for each item required by this Formula. Required.

39. The Description of the ingredient entered displays. This defaults from the ItemMaster table.

40. Enter Quantity of the ingredient that this Formula requires. The quantityentered in this field is the default standard quantity used for the recipe. It canbe changed at the recipe level. Required.

41. Enter the UOM for the Quantity entered. The inventory unit of measure for theItem is the default. If you enter a different unit of measure, you set up a unit ofmeasure conversion between the default and the unit of measure you decide toenter. Conversions between units of measure of the same unit of measure type(for example, both mass) are defined when the unit of measure is defined inSystem Administration. Conversions between different unit of measure typesmust be defined for each item on the Item Lot/Sublot Standard Conversionwindow in Inventory Management. Required.

42. Select the Scale Type as:

� Fixed if the ingredient is not scalable.

� Proportional if the ingredient is scalable.

� Integer if the ingredient is scalable by multiples.

Required. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

3-42 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 121: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

43. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

44. Enter the Scale Multiple as the scaling increment for the ingredient.

45. Enter the Rounding Direction as:

� Down if the acceptable rounding direction is down to the nearest multiple.

� Either if the acceptable rounding direction is up or down to the nearestmultiple.

� Up if the acceptable rounding direction is up to the nearest multiple.

46. Contribute to Step Qty indicates whether the Line contributes to the stepquantity.

� Select Yes if the Line contributes to step quantity.

� Select No if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

Required.

47. Select the Phantom Type:

� Not a Phantom indicates the ingredient is not a phantom item.

� Automatic Generation indicates the ingredient is a phantom item that isexploded automatically.

� Manual Generation indicates that the ingredient is a phantom item thatrequires manual explosion.

Required.

48. Enter the Scrap Factor as the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is 10percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodate for thisloss. Required.

49. Required Qty displays the result of multiplying the Formula Quantity by thequantity one plus the Scrap Factor expressed as a percent. For example, if theScrap Factor is 10 percent and the Formula Quantity is 100 pounds, the

Formulas 3-43

Page 122: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

Required Quantity is 110 pounds. It represents the planned quantity plus thescrap.

50. Click Edit Line to display the Formula Product Line Edit window.

51. Click Products to display the Formula Product Lines window.

52. Click By-Products to display the Formula By-Product Lines window.

53. Click Ingredients to display the Formula Ingredient Lines window.

54. Save the window.

�� To scale the formula:1. Choose Scale from the Actions menu. The Scale Formula window displays.

2. Select one of the following:

� Percent to scale by a percentage. Enter the value in the Factor field.

� Item Quantity to scale by a specific quantity. Enter the New Quantity.

3. Click OK. The window displays the scaled formula.

�� To mark the formula for deletion:1. Choose Mark for Purge from the Actions menu.

2. The record is marked for deletion.

3. Save the window.

�� To change the formula status:1. Choose Change Status from the Actions menu.

2. Change the Current Status displayed by selecting a different status from theChange Status To list.

3. Click OK. The Formula Details window displays the revised Status for theFormula.

�� To edit the formula text:1. Choose Edit Text from the Actions menu.

2. Make the appropriate edits to formula text.

3. Save the window.

3-44 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 123: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

�� To access the Production Samples window:1. Choose Samples from the Actions menu. The Production Samples window

displays.

2. Evaluate production samples.

3. Close the window.

�� To access the Production Results window:1. Choose Results from the Actions menu. The Production Results window

displays.

2. Evaluate production results.

3. Close the window.

�� To display specifications:1. Choose Specifications from the Actions menu. The Specifications window

displays.

2. Evaluate specifications.

3. Close the window.

�� To select technical data:1. Choose Technical Data Selection from the Actions menu. The Technical Data

Selection window displays.

2. Evaluate technical data.

3. Close the window.

�� To display product technical parameters:1. Select the Line where you want to display technical parameters.

2. Choose Product Technical Parameters from the Actions menu. The ProductTechnical Parameters window displays.

3. Evaluate the technical parameters for the product.

4. Close the window.

Formulas 3-45

Page 124: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

�� To list experimental items:1. Choose List Experimental Items from the Actions menu. The List

Experimental Items window displays.

2. Evaluate the list for the Laboratory Formula and Laboratory Version displayed.The Experimental Item and a brief Description are displayed for eachcomponent in the list.

3. Close the window.

�� To display theoretical yield:1. Choose Theoretical Yield from the Actions menu. The Theoretical Yield

window displays.

2. Evaluate the Yield Percent.

3. Click OK to close the window.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

1. Retrieve or enter data in the Formula Details window.

2. Select the Line that contains the item that you want to edit. Select a blank line ifyou want to define a new regulatory item, or to search for an existing regulatoryitem.

3. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

� If you selected a blank line, the Find Regulatory Items window displays sothat you can select a regulatory item.

3-46 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 125: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

4. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

5. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not select ablank line to enter a regulatory item, you do not edit the information, and you donot save the window; you close it.

�� To duplicate a record:1. Retrieve the Formula Details record you want to duplicate.

2. Choose New from the File menu.

3. Choose Duplicate Record Above from the Edit menu.

4. Enter a new Formula name and Version number.

5. Save the window.

Scaling a FormulaThe Scale Formula window enables you to scale a formula by a percent or by anitem quantity.

�� Using a Percent to Scale a FormulaEnter a percentage to scale any scalable ingredient up or down by a percent of thedisplayed quantity. For example, if you enter 100 percent, the quantity of theselected item is scaled up by 100 percent, or doubled, and the other quantities areincreased accordingly. If you enter -50, or negative fifty percent, the item quantity isdecreased by half.

Using an Item Quantity to Scale a FormulaThis is the simplest method to scale any scalable ingredients. Enter a new quantityof material.

�� To scale a formula by a percentage:1. Select the material Line you want to scale. For example, select a product.

Formulas 3-47

Page 126: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

2. Choose Scale from the Actions menu. The Scale Formula window displays.

3. Select the Percent radio button.

4. Enter a percentage for the scaling Factor. For example, to double the material,enter 100.

5. Click OK.

�� To scale a formula by entering a new quantity:1. Choose Scale from the Actions menu. The Scale Formula window displays.

2. Select the Item Quantity radio button.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Line displays the line number of the material on the Formula Detailswindow.

� Item displays the item code listed on the Formula Details window.

� Description displays a brief description of the Item.

� Old Quantity displays the quantity you want to rescale with its UOM.

4. Enter a New Quantity for the material.

5. Click OK.

Displaying Ingredient Technical Parameters

�� To display ingredient technical parameters:1. Choose Ingredient Technical Parameters from the Actions menu. The

Ingredient Technical Parameters window displays.

2. Evaluate technical parameters for selected ingredients and make necessarychanges.

3. Close the window.

Using the View Menu to Find a FormulaThe Find selection on the View menu enables you to find a formula.

�� To find a formula from the View menu:1. Choose Find from the View menu.

3-48 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 127: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Formula Details

2. Enter as many parameters as needed to complete the search:

� Status

� Formula

� Version

� Description

� Product

� Formula Class

� Project

� Organization

� Scaling Allowed

� Marked for Deletion

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of the search.

5. Close the window.

Formulas 3-49

Page 128: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Product Summary

Displaying the Formula Product SummaryThe Formula Product Summary window enables you to display a summary ofproducts listed in a formula.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display the formula product summary:1. Navigate to the Formula Product Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for products listed in the Formula.

� Item No determines the item code for products listed in the Formula.

� Quantity determines the amount for products listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the product entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for products listed in the Formula.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

– Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

� Contributes To Step Qty displays:

– Yes if the Line contributes to step quantity.

– No if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

� Required Qty displays planned quantity plus the scrap.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed or Proportional. Refer tothe "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

3-50 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 129: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Product Summary

3. Click Edit Line to display the Formula Product Line Edit window.

4. Close the window.

Formulas 3-51

Page 130: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Byproduct Summary

Displaying the Formula Byproduct SummaryThe Formula By-Product Summary window enables you to display a summary ofbyproducts listed in a formula.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display the formula byproduct summary:1. Navigate to the Formula By-Product Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for byproducts listed in the Formula.

� Item No determines the item code for byproducts listed in the Formula.

� Quantity determines the amount for byproducts listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the byproduct entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for byproducts listed in the Formula.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Contributes to Step Qty displays:

– Yes if the byproduct contributes to the step quantity.

– No if the byproduct does not contribute to the step quantity.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed or Proportional. Refer tothe "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

3. Optionally, click Edit Line to display the Formula By-Product Line Editwindow.

4. Close the window.

3-52 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 131: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Ingredient Summary

Displaying the Formula Ingredient SummaryThe Formula Ingredient Summary window enables you to display a summary ofingredients listed in a formula.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display the formula ingredient summary:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for ingredients listed in the Formula.

� Item No determines the item code for ingredients listed in the Formula.

� Quantity determines the amount for ingredients listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the ingredient entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for ingredients listed in the Formula.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

– Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

� Contributes to Step Qty indicates whether the Line contributes to stepquantity, and displays:

– Yes if the ingredient contributes to the step quantity.

– No if the ingredient does not contribute to the step quantity.

� Scrap Factor displays the anticipated amount of ingredient loss duringmanufacturing as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is 10percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodate forthis loss.

Formulas 3-53

Page 132: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Formula Ingredient Summary

� Required Qty displays the planned quantity plus the scrap.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed, Proportional, or Integer.Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Phantom Type determines whether the ingredient is not a phantom, is anautogenerated phantom, or is a manually generated phantom.

3. Click Details to display the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window.

4. Close the window.

3-54 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 133: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying a Summary of Formula Product Lines

Displaying a Summary of Formula Product LinesThe Formula Product Line Summary window enables you to display formulaproduct lines.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display the formula product line summary:1. Navigate to the Formula Product Line Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each product listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each product listed in the Formula.

� Description displays a brief explanation of the product entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� Quantity determines the amount for each product listed in the Formula.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for quantities of product listed in theFormula.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

– Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

� Scale Type determines if the Formula scale type. Refer to the "ScalingFormulas" topic for advice.

� Rework Type determines if the product Line is Not Rework or the DefaultBatch Quantity.

� Contribute to Step Qty displays:

– Yes if the byproduct contributes to the step quantity.

– No if the byproduct does not contribute to the step quantity.

� Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

Formulas 3-55

Page 134: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying a Summary of Formula Product Lines

3. Click Details to display the Formula Product Line Edit window.

4. Close the window.

3-56 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 135: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Product Lines

Editing Formula Product LinesThe Formula Product Lines window enables you to edit formula product lines.

You cannot delete the last remaining product or ingredient in a formula. You cannotdelete a product from a formula that has a validity rule saved for the formula andproduct combination.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit the formula product lines:1. Navigate to the Formula Product Lines window.

2. Line displays the line sequence for each product listed in the Formula.

3. Enter the Item No as the item code for each product listed in the Formula.Required.

4. Enter the Quantity as the amount for each product listed in the Formula.Required.

5. Description displays a brief explanation of the product entered. This defaultsfrom the Item Master table.

6. Enter the UOM as the unit of measure for the Quantity. Required.

7. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

8. Enter the Contribute To Step Qty field as:

� Yes if the product contributes to step quantity.

� No if the product does not contribute to step quantity.

Formulas 3-57

Page 136: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Product Lines

9. Enter the Scale Type to indicate whether the scaling is Fixed, Proportional, orInteger. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

10. Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

11. Save the window.

12. Optionally, click Edit Line to edit a selected Line Number. The FormulaProduct Line Edit window displays.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

1. Retrieve or enter data in the Formula Product Lines window.

2. Select the Line that contains the item that you want to edit. Select a blank line ifyou want to enter a regulatory item in the formula.

3. Select Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

� If you selected a blank line, the Find Regulatory Items window displays sothat you can select a regulatory item.

4. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

5. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not select a

3-58 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 137: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Product Lines

blank line to enter a regulatory item, you do not edit the information, and you donot save the window; you close it.

Formulas 3-59

Page 138: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Product Line

Editing a Formula Product LineThe Formula Product Line Edit window enables you to edit formula product lines.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit a formula product line:1. Navigate to the Formula Product Line Edit window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each product listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each product listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the product entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

3. Enter the Quantity for the product Line listed in the Formula. Required.

4. Enter the UOM for the Quantity. Required.

5. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

6. Select the Scale Type as Fixed, Proportional, or Integer. Refer to the "ScalingFormulas" topic for advice. Required.

7. Select the Contributes To Step Qty check box if the Line contributes to stepquantity. Clear the box if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

8. Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

9. Save the window.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

3-60 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 139: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Product Line

1. Retrieve data in the Formula Product Line Edit window.

2. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

3. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

4. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not edit theinformation, and you do not save the window; you close it.

Formulas 3-61

Page 140: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying a Summary of Formula Byproduct Lines

Displaying a Summary of Formula Byproduct LinesThe Formula By-Product Line Summary window enables you to display a summaryof formula byproduct lines.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display a summary of formula byproducts:1. Navigate to the Formula By-Product Line Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the byproduct entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� Quantity determines the amount for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for the quantity.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

– Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed or Proportional. Refer tothe "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Contributes to Step Qty displays:

– Yes if the byproduct contributes to the step quantity.

– No if the byproduct does not contribute to the step quantity.

3. Click Details to display the Formula By-Product Line Edit window.

4. Close the window.

3-62 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 141: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Byproduct Lines

Editing Formula Byproduct LinesThe Formula By-Product Lines window enables you to edit formula byproductlines.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit the formula byproduct lines:1. Navigate to the Formula By-Product Lines window.

2. Line displays the line sequence for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

3. Enter the Item No as the item code for each byproduct listed in the Formula.Required.

4. Enter the Quantity as the amount for each byproduct listed in the Formula.Required.

5. Description displays a brief explanation of the byproduct entered. This defaultsfrom the Item Master table.

6. Enter the UOM as the unit of measure for the quantity. Required.

7. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

8. Select the Contributes To Step Qty field:

� Yes if the ingredient contributes to the step quantity

� No if the ingredient does not contribute to the step quantity.

Required.

9. Enter the Scale Type to indicate whether the scaling is Fixed or Proportional.Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

Formulas 3-63

Page 142: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Byproduct Lines

10. Save the window.

11. Optionally, click Edit Line to edit a selected Line Number. The FormulaBy-Product Line Edit window displays.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

1. Retrieve or enter data in the Formula By-Product Lines window.

2. Select the Line that contains the item that you want to edit. Select a blank line ifyou want to enter a regulatory item in the formula.

3. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

� If you selected a blank line, the Find Regulatory Items window displays sothat you can select a regulatory item.

4. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

5. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not select ablank line to enter a regulatory item, you do not edit the information, and you donot save the window; you close it.

3-64 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 143: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Byproduct Line

Editing a Formula Byproduct LineThe Formula By-Product Line Edit window enables you to edit formula byproductlines.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit a formula byproduct line:1. Navigate to the Formula By-Product Line Edit window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each byproduct listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the byproduct entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

3. Enter the Quantity for the byproduct Line listed in the Formula. Required.

4. Enter the UOM for the quantity. Required.

5. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

6. Enter the Scale Type as Fixed or Proportional. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas"topic for advice. Required.

7. Select the Contributes To Step Qty check box if the Line contributes to stepquantity. Clear the box if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

8. Save the window.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

Formulas 3-65

Page 144: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Byproduct Line

1. Retrieve data in the Formula By-Product Line Edit window.

2. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

3. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

4. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not edit theinformation, and you do not save the window; you close it.

3-66 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 145: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying a Summary of Formula Ingredient Lines

Displaying a Summary of Formula Ingredient LinesThe Formula Ingredient Line Summary window enables you to display formulaproduct lines.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To display a summary of formula ingredients:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Line Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the ingredient entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

� Quantity determines the amount for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

� UOM determines the unit of measure for the quantity.

� Release Type determines how the Line is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

– Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

– Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed, Proportional, or Integer.Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Phantom Type indicates whether the ingredient is not a phantom, is anautogenerated phantom, or is a manually generated phantom.

� Contributes to Step Qty displays:

– Yes if the ingredient contributes to the step quantity.

– No if the ingredient does not contribute to the step quantity.

� Scrap Factor indicates the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is

Formulas 3-67

Page 146: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying a Summary of Formula Ingredient Lines

10 percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodatefor this loss.

� Required Quantity displays the result of multiplying the Formula Quantityby the quantity one plus the Scrap Factor expressed as a percent. Forexample, if the Scrap Factor is 10 percent and the Formula Quantity is 100pounds, the Required Quantity is 110 pounds.

3. Click Details to display the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window.

4. Close the window.

3-68 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 147: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Ingredient Lines

Editing Formula Ingredient LinesThe Formula Ingredient Lines window enables you to edit formula ingredient lines.

You cannot delete the last remaining product or ingredient in a formula.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit the formula ingredient lines:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Lines window.

2. Line displays the line sequence for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

3. Enter the Item No as the item code for the ingredient listed in the Formula.Required.

4. Enter the Quantity as the amount for each ingredient listed in the Formula.Required.

5. Description displays a brief explanation of the ingredient listed in the Formula.

6. Enter the UOM as the unit of measure for the quantity. Required.

7. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

8. Select the Contributes To Step Qty field:

� Yes if the ingredient contributes to the step quantity

� No if the ingredient does not contribute to the step quantity.

Required.

9. Enter the Scrap Factor as the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is 10

Formulas 3-69

Page 148: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Ingredient Lines

percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodate for thisloss. Required.

10. Required Qty displays the result of multiplying the Formula Quantity by thequantity one plus the Scrap Factor expressed as a percent. For example, if theScrap Factor is 10 percent and the Formula Quantity is 100 pounds, theRequired Quantity is 110 pounds. It represents the planned quantity plus thescrap.

11. Enter the Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed, Proportional, orInteger. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

12. Enter the Phantom Type to indicate whether the ingredient is not a phantom, isan autogenerated phantom, or is a manually generated phantom. Required.

13. Save the window.

14. Optionally, click Edit Line to edit a selected Line Number. The FormulaIngredient Line Edit window displays.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

1. Retrieve or enter data in Formula Ingredient Lines the window.

2. Select the Line that contains the item that you want to edit. Select a blank line ifyou want to define a new regulatory item, or to search for an existing regulatoryitem.

3. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

� If you selected a blank line, the Find Regulatory Items window displays sothat you can select a regulatory item.

3-70 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 149: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Formula Ingredient Lines

4. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

5. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not select ablank line to enter a regulatory item, you do not edit the information, and you donot save the window; you close it.

�� To find a formula line:1. Choose Find... from the View menu. The Find Formula Line window displays.

2. Enter one or more of the following to narrow your search:

� Formula No as the formula code number.

� Formula Version as the formula version number.

� Line Type as Automatic, Manual, or Incremental release.

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of your search.

5. Optionally, click New to enter a new formula line.

Formulas 3-71

Page 150: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Ingredient Line

Editing a Formula Ingredient LineThe Formula Ingredient Line Edit window enables you to edit formula ingredientlines.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To edit a formula ingredient line:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Line determines the line sequence for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

� Item determines the item code for each ingredient listed in the Formula.

� Description determines a brief explanation of the ingredient entered. Thisdefaults from the Item Master table.

3. Enter the Quantity for the ingredient Line listed in the Formula. Required.

4. Enter the UOM for the quantity. Required.

5. Select the Release Type to indicate how the Line is released:

� Automatic if the line is automatically released or completed whensubsequent lines are released or completed.

� Manual if the line must be released and completed manually.

� Incremental if the line must be released by incremental backflushing.

Required.

6. Enter the Scale Type as Fixed, Proportional, or Integer. Refer to the "ScalingFormulas" topic for advice. Required.

7. Enter the Phantom Type to indicate that this Line is not a phantom, is anautogenerated phantom, or is a manually generated phantom. Required.

8. Select the Contributes To Step Qty check box if the Line contributes to stepquantity. Clear the box if the Line does not contribute to step quantity.

9. Enter the Scrap Factor as the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is 10

3-72 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 151: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Formula Ingredient Line

percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodate for thisloss. Required.

10. Required Quantity displays the result of multiplying the Formula Quantity bythe quantity one plus the Scrap Factor expressed as a percent. For example, ifthe Scrap Factor is 10 percent and the Formula Quantity is 100 pounds, theRequired Quantity is 110 pounds.

11. Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

12. Save the window.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation.

1. Retrieve data in the Formula Ingredient Line Edit window.

2. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

3. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

4. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not edit theinformation, and you do not save the window; you close it.

Formulas 3-73

Page 152: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

Running the Indented Bill of Materials ReportThe Indented Bill of Materials Report is also called the Indented Formulas Report.The report displays all of the ingredients and ingredient quantities that are used toproduce an item. Any ingredients that are intermediates can be exploded into theiringredients. Note that circular references are allowed one level deep so that an itemcan be both an ingredient and a product in a formula. Circular references beyondone level, however, are identified with an error message.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

Understanding the Indented Bill of Materials ReportThe Indented Bill of Materials Report window enables you to specify the formula,item, or range of formulas for the report. Enter other parameters to specify theformula to use, such as the type of laboratory, whether the formula is used forproduction, MRP, or cost management, and the effective date of that formula.

The Indented Bill of Materials Report window has two modes of operation:

� Interactive, where the application initially displays a list of all of the formulasthat meet the parameters entered. For example, if you enter an item and batchquantity, and there are several valid formulas for making the specified quantityand effective date for the item, the application lists each of those formulas. Youselect the appropriate formula, and the Indented Bill of Materials Report isgenerated for that formula.

� Noninteractive, where the application picks the formula to use based on theeffective date preference. If two or more formulas have the same preferencelevel, the application uses the most recent formula.

�� To run the report:1. Navigate to the Indented Bill of Materials Report window.

Selection Range2. Determine how you want to explode formulas:

� Select the Interactive check box to use the interactive mode. This enablesyou to select from a list of effective dates.

� Clear the Interactive check box to use the noninteractive mode. This usesthe most recent effective date for a formula.

3-74 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 153: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

3. When you run an IBOM report for the first time, the report explodes a formularegardless of the selection indicated in this field. Determine if you want toreexplode formulas that have already been exploded in previous reports:

� Select the Re-Explode check box if you want to reexplode formulas thatappear in the report.

� Clear the Re-Explode check box if you do not want to reexplode formulasthat appear in the report.

4. Determine if you want to explode inactive formulas:

� Select the Use Inactive check box if you want to explode inactive formulas.

� Clear the Use Inactive check box if you do not want to explode inactiveformulas.

5. Select one of the following radio buttons:

� Select the Single Formula radio button if you want to print the IndentedBill of Materials Report for a single formula. When you click this button, theFormula and Version fields become available for entry.

– Enter the code of the Formula for the Indented Bill of Materials Report. Thisfield is editable if you selected to explode a single formula Required whendisplayed.

– Enter the Formula Version you want for the Indented Bill of MaterialsReport. This field is editable if you selected to explode a single formula.Required when displayed.

� Select the Single Item radio button if you want to print the Indented Bill ofMaterials Report for a specific product.

– Enter the Item code for the product you for the Indented Bill of MaterialsReport. This field only displays when you select to explode a single item.The item description displays. Required when displayed.

– Enter the Batch Qty of the product you want for the Indented Bill ofMaterials Report. This quantity is used to determine the formula to use. Theformula must be valid for this quantity and capable of proper ingredientscaling. This field is only displayed if you selected to explode a formula fora single item. Required when displayed.

– Enter the UOM for the batch quantity. This field is only displayed if youselected to explode a formula for a single item. Required when displayed.

Formulas 3-75

Page 154: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

� Select Formula Range if you want to print the bills of materials for a rangeof formulas. You cannot enter formula ranges if you are using theinteractive mode. Enter the starting and ending Range of formulas youwant. If you enter a range of formulas, the application starts one concurrentprocess for each formula entered. Each formula has its own separate report.

Other Options6. Enter Scale By as the appropriate scaling percent. The default is 100. Required.

7. Enter the number of Levels you want printed on report. The default is All.

8. Select a Recipe Use that you want to use as the basis of the report. You canselect production, planning, costing, regulatory, or technical. Required.

9. Enter the Effective Date and time for the Formula. Only formulas that areeffective on this date and time are used as the basis for the report. Required.

10. Select the UOM Type as:

� Formula if you want the formula unit of measure type used.

� Inventory if you want the inventory unit of measure type used.

Required.

Print Options11. Enter the number of report Copies you want. If you selected a range of

formulas, then each bill of materials is printed this number of times. Required.

12. Enter the code identifying the Printer that you want to use to print the report.

13. Click OK.

14. The Submission History window displays.

15. Record the Request ID.

�� To display the output of the Indented Bill of Materials Report:1. Run the Indented Bill of Materials Report.

2. Choose Requests from the View menu.

3. Select All My Requests.

4. Click Find.

3-76 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 155: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

5. Choose the indicator next to the requested Indented Bill of Materials Reportthat you want to display. Make sure that the report phase has completedwithout errors.

6. Click View Output. The report you selected is displayed.

�� To interpret the Indented Bill of Materials Report:1. Run the Indented Bill of Materials Report.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Formula is the code for the formula used for the Indented Bill of MaterialsReport. A colon appears before the formula version number. A descriptionof the Formula and the Version displays.

� Recipe Use indicates whether the formula is for production, planning,costing, regulatory, or technical.

� Effective Date specified. Formulas that appear on the report are effective onthis date.

� Products produced by the Formula. To the right of each product item codetwo numbers appear in parentheses. Each number is separated by a slashmark. The first number displays the batch quantity of the product. Thisnumber is either the product quantity multiplied by the scale, or the batchquantity you entered in the Batch Quantity field. The second number is theproduct quantity from the Formula. The unit of measure for the batchquantity and formula quantity follow in parentheses with the itemdescription of the product.

� Scale Percent indicates the scaling percent for the Formula. A scale percentof zero indicates that a formula is not scaled, and is the same as the scalepercent of 100.

� Use Inactive Formulas has a 0 if no inactive formulas were used, or a 1 ifinactive formulas were used.

� Max Explode Levels indicates the maximum number of levels to explodeformulas.

� Exploded Date is the date the Formula was exploded.

� Ingredient -- Description indicates the item code for each ingredient in theexploded formula followed by the ingredient description. In addition toingredients, byproducts are displayed, and are preceded by the labelBy-product. If any of the ingredients is an intermediate, or a product in

Formulas 3-77

Page 156: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Running the Indented Bill of Materials Report

another formula, the ingredient line is followed by the label Formula. Thisline displays formula codes and versions used to explode intermediates intotheir ingredients. Following this line are the ingredients in this Formula. Inaddition to the ingredients, byproducts are identified with the label Byp:and coproducts are identified by Cop: label. Byproducts, coproducts, andingredients in the Formula that produces the intermediate are indentedseparately from the ingredients in the main formula. Once the indentationends, the items that begin at the left margin of the report are ingredients inthe main formula listed at the top of the report page.

� Levels of indentation are displayed for item lines from the main formulalisted at the top of the report page. The highest level is level one isidentified by a 1. Intermediates are at level two is identified by 2. Theindentation progresses for each of the defined Levels. For example, 3, 4, and5 are indentations for levels 3, 4, and 5 respectively.

� Batch Quantity is the amount of ingredient necessary to produce the batchquantity of the product. For byproduct or coproduct lines, this is thequantity of the byproduct or coproduct that is produced when the batchquantity of the main product is produced.

� Formula Quantities are the amounts of ingredients, byproducts, andcoproducts in the Formula.

� Standard Quantity of product is the amount used to produce anyintermediates. If the quantity of an intermediate needed in the mainformula is different from this standard quantity, the intermediate formula isautomatically scaled. The scaled product quantity and scaled ingredientquantities are shown in the Batch Quantity column.

� UOM is the unit of measure for the unit of measure for the StandardQuantity.

3-78 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 157: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using Formula Inquiry

Using Formula InquiryThe Formula Inquiry Selection window is the starting point for Formula Inquiryqueries. Using a selection range to narrow the search of formula information, youhave the ability to display a summary list of formulas that fit the parameters youspecify. The inquiry delivers a Formula Inquiry Summary View window where youdisplay parent level and intermediate level formula information.

Prerequisites� Enter and save formulas.

�� To perform a formula inquiry:1. Navigate to the Formula Inquiry Selection window.

2. Select one of the following for the Active/Inactive Formula field:

� Active to query formulas that are active.

� Inactive to query formulas that are inactive.

� All to query all active and inactive formulas.

3. Select one of the following for the Validity Rules field:

� Defined to query components with defined validity rules.

� Undefined for components with undefined validity rule.

� Both to query all components.

Recipe Used In4. Select one, all or any combination of the following uses:

� Production for use in production.

� Planning for use in planning.

� Costing for use in cost management.

� Regulatory for use in regulatory management.

� Technical for use in formula analysis. Technical Class is a category used toidentify and group ingredients where the overall contribution of specifictechnical characteristics of the ingredients is significant.

Formulas 3-79

Page 158: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using Formula Inquiry

Selection Range5. Determine whether you want to display a specific Formula, a range of

formulas, or all formulas. To select a specific Formula, enter the same formulain the From and To fields. To select a range of formulas, enter different formulanumbers in the From and To fields. To select all formulas leave the fields blank.

6. Determine whether you want to display a specific Formula Version, a range ofversions or all versions. To select a specific version, enter the same versionnumber in the From and To fields. To select a range of formula versions, enterdifferent version numbers in the From and To fields. To select all versions leavethe fields blank. Required.

7. Determine whether you want to display a specific Routing, a range of routingsor all routings. To select a specific routing, enter the same routing number in theFrom and To fields. To select a range of routings, enter different routingnumbers in the From and To fields. To select all routings leave the fields blank.

8. Determine whether you want to display a specific Routing Version, a range ofrouting versions or all routing versions. To select a specific routing version,enter the same routing number in the From and To fields. To select a range ofrouting numbers, enter different routing numbers in the From and To fields. Toselect all routing numbers leave the fields blank.

9. Determine whether you want to display formulas for a specific Organization, arange of organizations or all organizations effective for your user code. To selecta specific organization, enter the same Organization in the From and To fields.To select a range of organizations enter different organizations in the From andTo fields. To select all organizations leave the fields blank.

10. Determine whether you want to display the formulas for a specific EffectiveDate, a range of effective dates or all effective dates. To select a specific date,enter the same date in the From and To fields. To select a range of dates, enterdifferent dates in the Range From and To fields. To select all dates leave thefields blank.

11. Determine whether you want to display formulas for a specific Customer, arange of customers or all customers. To select a specific customer, enter thesame customer code in the From and To fields. To select a range of customers,enter different customer numbers in the Range From and To fields. To select allformulas leave the fields blank.

12. Enter the Product item number in this field to display formulas for a specificproduct.

3-80 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 159: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using Formula Inquiry

13. Enter the Effective Qty of the item produced by the formula. This field becomesavailable if you indicate a specific formula and version or a specific itemproduced. The unit of measure displays.

14. Enter the Ingredient used to display formulas that contain it.

15. Click OK. The Formula Inquiry Summary View window displays.

16. Refer to the Interpreting a Formula Inquiry topic for a complete explanation ofusing the Formula Inquiry Summary View window.

Formulas 3-81

Page 160: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

Interpreting a Formula InquiryThe Formula Inquiry Summary View is the first window displayed after you makeentries in the Formula Inquiry window. It lists formulas that meet the enteredparameters.

From this window, you can obtain additional information for any formula. FormulaInquiry Summary consists of two window areas. The top area is scrollable and liststhe organization, formula number and version, routing, and minimum andmaximum quantity from the formula effectivity record. The bottom area of thewindow is synchronized with the line that is selected in the upper area and lists theStart and End Dates, the Formula Status, the Standard Quantity, the Customer, andFormula Use.

Formulas you are not permitted to access are shown with a # symbol in the far leftcolumn.

You can use flexfields with this window. See Oracle Applications User’s Guide andOracle Applications Flexfields Guide.

Prerequisites� Complete the appropriate entries in the Formula Inquiry window to display the

Formula Inquiry Summary View.

�� To interpret the Formula Inquiry Summary:1. Navigate to the Formula Inquiry Summary View window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Organization where the formula is effective. You can only display formulaseffective to organizations linked to your user code. A # sign indicates youcannot display the formula.

� Formula code for each formula.

� Version number for each Formula.

� Routing number for each Formula Version.

� Version number for each Routing.

� Minimum Qty as the minimum quantity where the Formula is valid.

� Maximum Qty for as the maximum quantity where the Formula is valid.

� UOM listed for each Formula.

3-82 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 161: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

3. The following fields display data that is specific to the formula selected:

� Effective Dates lists the dates that formulas and versions are valid.

� Active Formula indicates whether or not a specific Formula is active. It isblank if the Formula is inactive.

� Standard Qty is the typical quantity that is produced by each formula.

� Customer is the name of the individual or company who buys the listedformulas.

� Recipe Use displays the intended use for the Formula in production,planning, costing, regulatory, or technical.

� Customer displays the customer who uses the selected formula.

4. Close the window.

Displaying Details from a Formula InquiryThe Formula View window enables you to display the parent formula or highestlevel formula. You have the ability to display intermediates from this window usingthe Actions menu.

�� To display details from a formula inquiry:1. Select the appropriate Formula from the Formula View Inquiry window.

2. Choose Formula View from the Actions menu. The Formula View windowdisplays.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Formula displays the unique identifying code for the formula selected.

� Version displays the version of the Formula.

� Description displays the detailed descriptive information about theFormula.

� Comments displays any comments that you added at the header level.

� Formula Class displays how the Formula is classified at the header level.

� Active Formula check box is selected if you are displaying an activeformula. It is cleared if you are displaying an inactive formula.

� Scaling Allowed check box is selected if scaling is allowed on the formula.It is cleared with scaling is not allowed. This information is taken from the

Formulas 3-83

Page 162: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

formula’s additional information. Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic foradvice.

Details4. The following fields are display only:

� Type indicates whether the item is a product, byproduct, or ingredient ofthe formula. The drill down indicator to the left of Type lets you drill downto a subcomponent.

� Item displays the item code of the product, byproduct, or ingredient of theformula.

� Description displays a brief description of the item.

� Quantity displays the quantity of the item used in the formula.

� UOM displays the unit of measure of the item.

5. The following fields display data that is specific to the component selected:

� Phantom Type indicates whether the material is not a phantom, is anautogenerated phantom, or is a manually generated phantom.

� Scrap Factor indicates the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage. For example, if the Scrap Factor is10 percent, an additional 10 percent of material is added to accommodatefor this loss. Required.

� Scale Type displays whether the scaling is Fixed, Proportional, or Integer.Refer to the "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Cost Allocation indicates how the cost of this item is allocated for financialrollup purposes.

6. Release Type indicates whether the item is automatic, manual, or incrementalrelease.

7. Close the window.

�� To display formula text:1. Choose View Text from the Actions menu.

2. The Text Editor window for the formula displays. If the cursor is on:

� the formula header area, header text displays.

� an unexpanded detail line, text associated with the ingredient displays.

3-84 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 163: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

� an expanded detail line, product text displays.

3. Edit appropriate text.

4. Save the window.

Displaying an Intermediate FormulaThe intermediate formula can only be displayed if the row is preceded by a + sign.

�� To display an intermediate formula:1. Select a row on the Formula View window that is preceded by a + sign.

2. Choose Lower Level from the Actions menu.

3. The intermediate formula of the selected item or product displays on theIntermediate Formula Inquiry Summary View window.

4. The following fields are display only:

� Organization displays the organization that owns the formula.

� Formula displays the intermediate formula name.

� Version displays the formula version number.

� Routing displays the routing associated to the formula.

� Version displays the routing version number.

� Minimum Qty displays the minimum quantity of the displayed formulaproduced by the routing.

� Maximum Qty displays the maximum quantity of the displayed formulaproduced by the routing.

� UOM is the unit of measure for the Minimum Qty and Maximum Qty.

� Effective Dates displays the dates that formulas and versions are valid.

� Standard Qty displays the typical quantity that is produced by the formula.

� Customer displays the name of the individual or company who buys thelisted formulas.

� Active Formula displays whether you are displaying an active or inactiveformula.

� Recipe Use displays how the recipe is used. For example, in production,planning, costing, regulatory or technical.

Formulas 3-85

Page 164: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Interpreting a Formula Inquiry

5. Close the window.

�� To condense an intermediate formula:The cursor must be on a line preceded by a - sign. All expanded formulas thatfollow that line are already condensed.

1. Choose Condense from the Actions menu.

2. The window contracts the display of lower level formulas.

3. Close the window.

3-86 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 165: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Analyzing a Formula

Analyzing a FormulaFormula analysis enables you to simulate the contribution of formula componentsin a product by weight or by volume. You can determine the quantities andpercentages of ingredients that have been classified by a Technical Class and aTechnical Subclass. For example, a Technical Class could include all volatile organicsolvents in a formula. Technical Subclasses of volatile organic solvents couldinclude mineral spirits or alcohols.

The Formula Analysis Parameters window lets you analyze a formula for TechnicalClass and Technical Subclass composition. You display the results of the analysis inthe Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis window.

Formula analysis is performed in the concurrent program manager so that resultscan be queried at your convenience. Each time this process is repeated for a specificformula in a specific organization, any previously calculated data is replaced forthat formula in that organization. The log file provides status messages issuedduring the formula analysis calculations. Use this file to identify any errors thatoccur.

Prerequisites� Set up technical parameters and appropriate sequences.

� Enter item technical data for the density of ingredients in formulas to beanalyzed. This is not required for intermediate items, but it is required for theircomponent materials.

� Set up technical classes and technical subclasses for ingredients that areincluded in a formula analysis. This is not required for intermediate items, butit is required for their component materials.

� Enter and save formulas. Identify the correct formula to use for anyintermediates in the parent formula. You can do this either by setting the ItemTechnical Data Selection or by using a Recipe with Validity Rules.

�� To analyze a formula:1. Navigate to the Formula Analysis Parameters window.

2. Specify the rule to use during the explosion of formula intermediates:

� Select Use Production Formulas to explode intermediates using a formulathat is Approved for General Use. Experimental intermediates are explodedusing a formula that is Approved for Laboratory Use.

Formulas 3-87

Page 166: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Analyzing a Formula

� Select Use Laboratory Formulas to explode all intermediates using aformula that is Approved for Laboratory Use.

Required.

3. Enter the code for the Organization where you want to analyze the formula.The organization entered retrieves and uses appropriate recipe validity ruleswhen it explodes an intermediate. If no validity rules are available for theorganization entered, global validity rules are applied. Required.

4. Enter the Formula to be used in the analysis. Required.

5. Enter the Version of the formula to be used in the analysis. Required.

6. The following fields are display only:

� Description of formula entered.

� Status of the formula entered.

7. Enter the Analysis Quantity as the total formula output required for thisanalysis. This value must be greater than zero. Required.

8. Enter the UOM for the Analysis Quantity. The unit of measure entered heremust be defined in the profile option GMD:UOM Mass Type or GMD:UOMVolume Type. Required.

9. Click Analyze. Note the Request ID number.

10. Choose View from the menu, and choose Requests to view the status of yourrequest in the concurrent program manager.

11. When your Request ID has completed with a Status of Normal, display theresults of the analysis as described in the Displaying Formula Analysis Resultstopic.

12. Select View Log... on the Requests window to view the explosions performedon intermediates using the rule that you specified in step 2. If any problemswere encountered in the explosion, they are listed in the Log file.

3-88 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 167: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

Displaying Formula Analysis ResultsThe Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis window displays the details of theanalysis of a particular formula in a specified organization. The window consists oftwo separate views that display Technical Class and Technical Subclass analysisresults by weight or by volume.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Analyze a formula as described in the Analyzing a Formula topic.

�� To display the results of a formula analysis by weight:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis window.

2. Query the analyzed formula.

3. Select View By Weight.

4. The following fields are display only:

� Organization displays the facility that owns the formula analyzed.

� Analysis Date displays the date of the analysis.

� Formula displays the formula used in the analysis.

� Version displays the version of the formula used in the analysis.

� Status displays the approval Status of the formula used in the analysis. Forexample, Approved for Laboratory Use indicates that the formula can beused in the laboratory.

� Product displays the main item in the formula analyzed.

� Description displays a description of the main item in the formulaanalyzed.

� View By displays the current type of view displayed. When View ByWeight is selected, Weight displays in this field.

� Explosion Rule displays the currently selected Explosion Rule used toexplode intermediates.

� Technical Class displays the Technical Class used to group ingredientcontributions.

Formulas 3-89

Page 168: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

� Direct Weight displays the actual weight of ingredients in the selectedFormula Technical Class.

� Direct (%) displays the Direct Weight of the Formula Technical Class as apercentage of the Total Weight.

� Indirect Weight displays the weight of ingredients within explodedintermediate products in the selected Formula Technical Class.

� Indirect (%) displays the Indirect Weight of the Formula Technical Class asa percentage of the Total Weight.

� Total Weight displays the sum of the Direct Weight and Indirect Weight inthe selected Formula Technical Class.

� Total (%) displays Total Weight of the Formula Technical Class as a percentof the entire Formula weight.

Item Detail5. The following fields are display only:

� Subclass displays the Formula Technical Subclass.

� Item displays the selected ingredient item in the Formula TechnicalSubclass.

� Direct Weight displays the actual weight of ingredients in the selectedFormula Technical Subclass.

� Direct (%) displays the Direct Weight of the Formula Technical Subclass asa percentage of the Total Weight.

� Indirect Weight displays the weight of ingredients within explodedintermediate products in the selected Formula Technical Subclass.

� Indirect (%) displays the Indirect Weight of the Formula Technical Subclassas a percentage of the Total Weight.

� Total Weight displays the sum of the Direct Weight and Indirect Weight inthe selected Formula Technical Subclass.

� Class (%) displays the percentage contribution of the selected FormulaTechnical Subclass to the entire Formula Technical Class.

� Formula (%) displays the percentage contribution of the selected FormulaTechnical Subclass as a percentage of the total Formula weight.

3-90 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 169: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

Subtotal6. The following fields are display only:

� Subclass displays the Formula Technical Subclass.

� Direct Weight displays the actual weight of ingredients in the selectedFormula Technical Subclass.

� Direct (%) displays the Direct Weight of the Formula Technical Subclass asa percentage of the Total Weight.

� Indirect Weight displays the weight of ingredients within explodedintermediate products in the selected Formula Technical Subclass.

� Indirect (%) displays the Indirect Weight of the Formula Technical Subclassas a percentage of the Total Weight.

� Total Weight displays the sum of the Direct Weight and Indirect Weight inthe selected Formula Technical Subclass.

� Class (%) displays the percentage contribution of the selected FormulaTechnical Subclass to the entire Formula Technical Class.

� Formula (%) displays the percentage contribution of the selected FormulaTechnical Subclass as a percentage of the total formula weight.

�� To display results of a formula analysis by volume:1. Navigate to the Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis window.

2. Query the analyzed formula.

3. Select View By Volume.

4. The fields displayed are calculated in terms of volume rather than weight.

Interpreting a Formula Ingredient Contribution AnalysisThe following example illustrates a simple formula analysis of Formula F1. It assistsyou in the interpretation of results displayed on the Formula IngredientContribution Analysis window.

Formula F1 makes 100 pounds of Product 1. The Analysis Quantity of Formula F1 is200.00 pounds. Formula F1 contains an intermediate, INT1. The intermediate INT1is produced by Formula F2.

Formula F1 is composed of:

� 40 pounds of ingredient 1

Formulas 3-91

Page 170: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

� Technical Class is Binder

� Technical Subclass is Acrylic

� 10 pounds of ingredient 2

� Technical Class is Solvent.

� Technical Subclass is Organic

� 50 pounds of intermediate 1

Intermediate INT1, Formula F2, is 50 pounds, and is composed of:

� 10 pounds of ingredient 1

� Technical Class is Binder

� Technical Subclass is Acrylic

� 25 pounds of ingredient 3

� Technical Class is Binder

� Technical Subclass is Acrylic

� 15 pounds of ingredient 4

� Technical Class is Solvent

� Technical Subclass is Alcohol

Formula Analysis of Formula F1 is:� The application calculates the ingredient direct contributions at the formula

level:

� ING1 is scaled to 80.00 pounds

� ING2 is scaled to 20.00 pounds

� INT1 is scaled to 100.00 pounds

� The application calculates the ingredient contributions at the exploded lowerlevels. These calculations consist of exploding each intermediate found at eachlevel of the formula. There is only one intermediate, INT1, in this example. Theformula that produces this intermediate does not contain any additionalintermediates. Therefore, the formula is exploded only one level. INT1 isexploded using Formula F2. Formula F2 is scaled by the quantity of INT1consumed by F1 after scaling, or 100 pounds.

Exploding F1 results in the following:

3-92 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 171: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

� 80.00 pounds of ING1 calculated from the direct contribution

� 20.00 pounds of ING1 calculated from the explosion of INT1

� 20.00 pounds of ING2 calculated from the direct contribution

� 50.00 pounds of ING3 calculated from the explosion of INT1

� 30.00 pounds of ING4 calculated from the explosion of INT1

The Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis for this example is:

Direct WeightBinder

� Acrylic

� ING1 is 80.00 pounds, representing 100% of the Direct Weight contribution

� Subclass Direct Weight is 80.00 pounds

� Class Direct Weight Total is 80.00 pounds

Binder Class Total is 80.00 pounds

Solvent

� Organic

� ING2 is 20.00 pounds, representing 100% of the Direct Weight contribution

� Subclass Direct Weight is 20.00 pounds

Solvent Class Total is 20.00 pounds

Indirect WeightBinder

� Acrylic

� ING1 is 20.00, representing 28.60% of the Indirect Weight contribution

� ING3 is 50.00, representing 71.40% of the Indirect Weight contribution

� Subclass Indirect Weight is 70.00 pounds

Binder Class Total is 70.00 pounds

Solvent

� Alcohol

Formulas 3-93

Page 172: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Formula Analysis Results

� ING 4 is 30.00 pounds, representing 100% of the Indirect Weightcontribution

Solvent Subclass Total is 30.00 pounds

Total WeightBinder

� Acrylic

� ING1 is 100.00 pounds, representing 66.67% of the Class

� ING3 is 50.00 pounds, representing 33.33% of the Class

Binder Subclass Total is 150.00 pounds, representing 100.00% of the Class and75.00% of the formula weight

Solvent

� Organic

� ING2 is 20.00 pounds, representing 40.00% of the Subclass

Solvent Subclass Total is 20.00 pounds, representing 40.00% of the Subclass and10.00% of the formula weight

� Alcohol

� ING4 is 30.00 pounds, representing 60.00% of the Subclass

Solvent Subclass Total is 30.00 pounds, representing 60.00% of the Subclass and15.00% of the formula weight

Ingredient Contribution SummaryBinder is 75.00% of the formula weight

Solvent is 25.00% of the formula weight, with 10% Organic Subclass and 15%Alcohol Subclass

3-94 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 173: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Finding a Formula Analysis

Finding a Formula AnalysisThe Find Analysis window helps you find an existing Formula IngredientContribution Analysis.

Prerequisites� Analyze formulas as described in the Analyzing a Formula topic.

�� To find a formula analysis:1. Navigate to the Find Analysis window.

2. Enter one or more of the following fields to narrow your search:

� Organization where the analysis was performed.

� Formula code of the formula.

� Version number of the Formula.

� Product as the main item in the Formula.

3. Click Find.

4. The Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis window displays the analysisfound that meets your search parameters.

Formulas 3-95

Page 174: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Overriding Default Explosion Rules

Overriding Default Explosion RulesThe Item Technical Data Selection window enables you to specify the formulasources for intermediate technical parameter values, thereby overriding automaticselection.

Prerequisites� Set up technical parameters.

� Set up technical parameter sequences.

� Enter item technical data for the density of every ingredient in formulas to beanalyzed.

� Set up technical classes and technical subclasses for all ingredients that areincluded in a formula analysis.

� Enter and save formulas.

�� To override default explosion rules:1. Navigate to the Formula Details window.

2. Select the Ingredient for custom explosion rules.

3. Select Item Technical Data Selection from the Actions menu. The ItemTechnical Data Selection window displays.

Spreadsheet4. This region is not used in this procedure.

Ingredient Contribution5. Enter the Formula number and Version to be used for the explosion of the

intermediate during the formula ingredient contribution analysis calculation.

6. Click OK.

3-96 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 175: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Oper

4

Operations

This topic shows you how to define and maintain operations, activities, andresources. You are also shown to find an operation. Summaries of operations andoperation headers provides an overview what is created. The process to enteroperation activity details and activity-resource details is explained. You are alsoshown how to display activity lines and edit a summary of resource lines.

The following topics provide a basic understanding of operations:

� Understanding Operations

� Requirements

� Solutions

� Defining and Maintaining Operations

� Defining and Maintaining Activities

� Defining and Maintaining Resources

� Finding an Operation

� Displaying the Operations Summary

� Displaying the Operation Header Summary

� Entering Operation Activity Details

� Entering Activity-Resource Details

� Displaying Operation Activity Line Summary

� Displaying the Resource Line Summary

� Editing a Resource Line

ations 4-1

Page 176: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Operations

Understanding OperationsAn operation is an ordered set of activities that have to be completed for apredetermined step in a production batch. Resource requirements that are neededto perform these activities are usually specified. You build operations fromactivities that require resources.

Operations are depicted hierarchically in the following diagram that shows the:

� Routing composed of a series of Operations organized in Steps.

� Operations composed of Activities containing Resources.

� Formula composed of Ingredient, Product, and possibly Byproduct.

� Recipe linking the Routing and Formula together with Processing Instructions.

The assembly of several operations in a stepwise progression creates a Routing.

4-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 177: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

RequirementsFollowing are some requirements that customers have for operations in NewProduct Development. The answers are explained in detail in the Solutions topic.

Does the application maximize production capacity resource usage?Yes. By using the Charge to calculate resource usage, the application captures thenumber of passes required to process a step based on the maximum capacity of thatstep. This is derived from specific resources used and can assist in maximizingusage of production capacity resources.

Can the application simplify the repeated entry of the same data for thesame activity?Yes. Using an Activity Factor defines the number of iterations that a specific activitycan be performed during an operation. The Activity Factor is considered inplanning and calculating resource usage.

Operations 4-3

Page 178: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

SolutionsNew Product Development provides solutions to help resolve issues at every stageof the product development process. The following represent some of the keyperformance solutions for operations.

Charges Refine Processing Requirements for Better Planning and Cost Management In manyprocess manufacturing plants, the capacity of a step is determined by theequipment used. For example, a mixing tank has a maximum capacity of 1000gallons. If more than 1000 gallons of material is added to this tank, it wouldoverflow. This maximum capacity determines the number of charges or iterationsthat are required to process the ingredients required for a defined batch. The timethat it takes to mix any volume of material through this operation is a fixed value.For example, one charge can require one hour of mixing. The problem arises when abatch is greater than the step capacity, and the step must be repeated several timesto make a full batch volume. Proportional scaling does not always reflect theprocessing requirements. For example, if a batch is planned for 4500 gallons and therouting step can have a tank capacity of 1000 gallons, five charges, or mini-batches,would be required to process the full 4500 gallons. Proportional scaling results inonly 4.5 hours of process time, whereas the actual required process time would befive hours. By refining the process requirements, the application delivers a betterassessment of usage rates that affect planning and cost management.

Activity Factors Streamline Resource Definition An Activity Factor defines the number oftimes an activity is performed. For example, if a quality test must be performed atthe beginning, middle, and end of a mixing time period, you must use an ActivityFactor of three. Activity Factors are applied to resource usage when planning andcalculating resource costs. They can be set to zero to exclude a particular activity orto select specific equipment or resources.

4-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 179: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Operations

Defining and Maintaining OperationsOperations are composed of a sequence of activities and required resources. Youenter and maintain the sequence of activities in the operation, and specify theresource, resource usage, and process quantity used for each activity. For example,a mixing activity can require one-half hour of use of a mixing system. Resourceusage and cost analysis codes that are associated with each activity are used tocalculate activity-based product costing.

Creating a New OperationCreate new operations on the Operation Details Activities window. When youdefine an operation, specify a combination of one or more activities performed inthe production batch and assign the resources used to perform those activities. Aresource can be any noninventory item that is used in production, such as a blenderor a heating device.

Maintaining OperationsUse the the following windows to maintain operations:

� Operations Summary By... to display a list of all defined operations with theirindividual version numbers and validity rules. These are summaries by Class,Status, or Owner. Display the Operation Details Activities window from theOperations Summary By... window.

� Operation Header Summary to display descriptive information on a specificoperation. Display the Operation Details Activities window from the OperationHeader Summary window.

� Operation Details Activities to enter, view, and edit an operation. Display thefollowing window from the Operation Details Activities window:

� Operation Activity Line

� Operation Details Activity Resources

The following graphic depicts the previously described operation navigation flow:

Operations 4-5

Page 180: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Operations

4-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 181: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Activities

Defining and Maintaining ActivitiesActivities are the basic tasks performed at your plant such as setup, mixing,cleanup, or cooling. You combine activities with resources such as blender, oven,labor, or utilities to define operations. Basic plant activities are identified by activitycodes. These codes are then combined to define the sequence of activities that canmake up an operation. You can associate a cost analysis code with each activity. Forexample, by defining cost classes, you can categorize individual activities onwhether or not they add value. Activity costs are the basic components of anactivity based accounting system.

Prerequisites� Set up activities.

Attaching Activities to OperationsAttach activities that were created in setup to specific operations using theOperation Details Activities window.

Maintaining ActivitiesYou can use the the following windows to maintain activities:

� Operation Activity Line Summary to view a summary of a specific activity lineincluding its description, process parameter, and factor. You can display theOperation Activity Line window from the Operation Activity Line Summarywindow.

� Operation Activity Line to view and edit pertinent information that is relevantto a specific operation line selected.

Operations 4-7

Page 182: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Resources

Defining and Maintaining ResourcesYou define and maintain resources on the Operation Activity window. Resourcesare the assets to produce batches, including production equipment, and employeelabor. You can define each resource very generally, for example, OVENS, orspecifically OVEN 1, OVEN 2 . . . OVEN n. For each resource assign a classificationcode for cost management purposes. You can group resources into resourceclassifications, for example, group OVENS and STOVES into COOKING UNITS.

Prerequisites� Set up resources.

See AlsoOracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management User’s Guide

Attaching Resources to ActivitiesAttach resources that were created in setup to activities using the OperationActivity window.

Maintaining ResourcesUse the the following windows to maintain resources:

� Operation Resource Line Summary to view a summary of resource lines. Youcan display the Operation Resource Line window from the Operation ResourceLine Summary window

� Operation Resource Line to view and edit specific resource lines.

4-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 183: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Finding an Operation

Finding an OperationThe Find Operations window enables you to find a specific operation.

Prerequisites� Enter and save operations.

�� To find an operation:1. Navigate to the Find Operations window.

2. Enter as many parameters as needed to complete the search:

� Enter search parameters in the Standard region for: Operation, Version,Description, Class, Valid From date, Valid To date, Process Quantity, orStatus.

� Enter search parameters in the Advanced region for a specific: Item,Condition, or Value.

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of the search.

5. Close the window.

Operations 4-9

Page 184: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Operations Summary

Displaying the Operations SummaryThe Operations Summary By... window displays a list of all defined operations withtheir individual version numbers and validity rules, by class, owner, or status.Display the Operation Details Activities window to view specific activitiesassociated with each of the operations.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save operation classes.

� Enter and save operations.

� Use the View By list to select how you want to view the summary of operations.Select one of the following:

� Class to display the list by operation class.

� Owner to display the list by owner.

� Status to display the list by operation status.

�� To display a list of all defined operations:1. Navigate to the Operations Summary By... window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Operation is the name of the Operation.

� Version is the version of the Operation.

� Valid From is the date the Operation is effective.

� Valid To is the date the Operation is no longer effective.

� Description is a brief explanation of the Operation.

� Class is the optional class of the Operation.

� Process Quantity UOM is the unit of measure for the process quantityassociated with the Operation.

3. Click Details to display the Operation Details Activities window.

4. Close the window.

4-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 185: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Operation Header Summary

Displaying the Operation Header SummaryThe Operation Header Summary window displays important descriptiveinformation on a specific operation. Use the Operation Details Activities window toenter, view, and edit an operation.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save operation classes.

� Enter and save operations.

�� To display a summary of the operation headers:1. Navigate to the Operation Header Summary window.

2. Select the appropriate Operation.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Status is the status of the Operation. Statuses are entered on the OperationDetails Activities window.

� Operation is the name of the Operation.

� Version is the version of the Operation.

� Description is a brief explanation of the Operation.

� Class is the optional class assigned to the Operation.

� Class Description is a brief description of the Class.

� Valid From is the date the Operation is effective.

� Valid To is the date the Operation is no longer effective.

� Process Qty UOM is the unit of measure for the process quantity associatedwith this Operation.

4. Click Details to display the Operation Details Activities window.

5. Close the window.

Operations 4-11

Page 186: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Operation Activity Details

Entering Operation Activity DetailsOperations are a combination of one or more activities performed in a productionbatch and the resources used to perform those activities. The Operation DetailsActivities window links operations to activities. Use the Activity Factor andactivity-resource association to enter an activity several times within an operation.Activity Factor simplifies data entry of the same activity several times by definingthe specific number of times that an activity is performed during an operation.Activity factor is taken into consideration for planning and resource calculationpurposes. Display the Operation Activity window to link one or more resources to asingle activity. Go to the Operation Activity Line Edit window to edit individualactivity lines.

You have the ability to save an operation that contains activities with no associatedresources as long as the operation status is New. Status cannot be changed toApproved for Laboratory Use or to Approved for General Use until all activitieshave resources associated to them.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save operation classes.

� Enter and save activities.

� Enter and save resources.

�� To enter operation details and activities:1. Navigate to the Operation Details Activities window.

2. Enter a name for the Operation to be entered. Required.

3. After entering all relevant information and saving the Operation with thedefault Status of New, return to this window if you need to change OperationStatus by selecting Change Status from the Actions menu. Depending onwhether Workflow is enabled, a different set of statuses is available.

Select a Status for the Operation you are entering from one of the following:

� Approved for Laboratory Use to indicate that the operation is approved forlaboratory use.

� Approved for General Use to indicate that the operation is approved foruse in production.

4-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 187: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Operation Activity Details

� Obsolete/Archived to indicate that the operation is no longer approved foruse and is obsoleted, archived, or both.

If Workflow is enabled, when you select:

� Approved for Laboratory Use, Status changes to Request Approval forLaboratory Use until all approvers have accepted the operation, when itsStatus changes to Approved for Laboratory Use.

� Approval for General Use, Status changes to Request Approval forGeneral Use until all approvers have accepted the operation, when itsStatus changes to Approved for General Use.

Refer to the Understanding the Status Approval Workflow topic for additionalinformation.

4. Enter the Version number for this operation. The combination of operationnumber and version must be unique. Required.

5. Enter a brief Description for the Version entered. Required.

6. Enter a Class for this operation to identify how it is categorized. The ClassDescription assigned to the Class displays.

7. Enter a Valid From date as a validity rule for this operation. The default date isthe current system date. Required.

8. Enter a To date as a validity rule for the expiration of this Operation. If there isno expiration date for this Operation, leave the field blank.

9. Enter the Owner Organization for this Operation. A Description of the OwnerOrganization displays.

10. Enter a Process Qty UOM for this Operation. Required.

Activities11. Enter an Activity required for this Operation. A Description of this activity

displays.

12. Enter the Activity Factor to specify the number of times the activity isperformed in this Operation. Required.

For example, if a quality test must be performed at the beginning, middle, andend of a mixing time period, rather than defining the activity and associatedresources three times, use the Activity Factor or multiplier to indicate thenumber of iterations for the same activity.

Operations 4-13

Page 188: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Operation Activity Details

To indicate that the activity must be performed at the beginning, middle, andend of the mixing time period, enter a factor of 3. Factors are applied to usage ofa resource when planning and calculating cost. Set the Activity Factor to zero toexclude a particular activity. You can also use this to select equipment used fora production run within this specific plant.

13. Enter the Offset Interval as the time delay from the start of the activity to thepoint where the resource is actually required. Required.

14. Repeat steps 11 through 13 for each Activity you need to enter for the specifiedOperation.

15. Save the window.

16. Click Resources to display the Operation Activity window.

17. Optionally, click Edit Activity Line to display the Operation Activity LineSummary window.

�� To mark the operation for deletion:1. Choose Mark for Purge from the Actions menu.

2. The record is marked for deletion.

3. Save the window.

�� To edit operation text:1. Choose Edit Text from the Actions menu.

2. Make the appropriate edits to operation text.

3. Save the window.

�� To display specifications:1. Choose Specifications from the Actions menu. The Specifications window

displays.

2. Evaluate specifications

3. Close the window.

�� To display quality control Samples:1. Choose Samples from the Actions menu. The Samples window displays.

2. Evaluate the samples.

4-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 189: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Operation Activity Details

3. Close the window.

�� To display quality control Results:1. Choose Results from the Actions menu. The Results window displays.

2. Evaluate the results.

3. Close the window.

�� To view alternate resources for the operation:1. Choose Operation Alternate Resources from the Actions menu.

2. The window displays the alternate resources available to this Operation if anyexist.

3. Close the window.

�� To change the operation status:1. Choose Change Status from the Actions menu.

2. Change the Current Status displayed by selecting a different Status from theChange Status To list.

3. Click OK.

4. The Operation Details Activities window displays the revised Status for theOperation.

�� To duplicate a record:1. Query the Operation Details Activity record you want to duplicate.

2. Choose New from the File menu.

3. Choose Duplicate Record Above from the Edit menu.

4. Enter a new Operation name and Version number.

5. Click OK.

6. Save the window.

Using the View Menu to Find an OperationThe Find selection on the View menu enables you to find an operation.

Operations 4-15

Page 190: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Operation Activity Details

�� To find an operation from the View menu:1. Choose Find from the View menu.

2. Enter one or more of these search parameters.

� Status

� Operation

� Version

� Description

� Operation Class

� Activity

� Resource

� Mark for Deletion

3. Click Find.

4-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 191: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Activity-Resource Details

Entering Activity-Resource DetailsThe Operation Activity window assigns resources to each activity, and lets you edita resource line once activities are associated with an operation. You access thiswindow when you click Resources on the Operation Details Activities window.

Charge calculates resource usage by capturing the number of passes required toprocess a step. This is based on the maximum capacity of the step as derived fromspecific resources used.

You can use flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save operations.

�� To assign resources to an activity:1. Navigate to the Operation Activity window.

2. Enter the Operation to associate activities. Required.

3. The Status assigned to the Operation displays.

4. The current Version number for the Operation displays.

5. Select the Activity to enter or edit a resource.

6. Click Resources.

ThroughputProcess units of measure and usage units of measure are derived from the plantresource if one is defined. You can override these values using this window. Aprocess quantity is converted to an operation process quantity unit of measure ifneeded.

7. The Resource and its Description displays.

8. Enter the planned Process Quantity for the Resource. Required.

This value combined with the Usage quantity define the usage rate. Forexample, if a resource can mix 200 gallons per hour, enter 200 as the ProcessQuantity, 1 as the Usage, and the unit of measure for hours.

9. The UOM entered on the header displays. This is the unit of measure for theplanned process quantity.

Operations 4-17

Page 192: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Activity-Resource Details

10. Enter the planned resource Usage. This is typically expressed in hours.Required.

11. Enter the UOM as the unit of measure for the Resource. Required.

Cost Information12. The Resource and its Description displays.

13. Enter the Component Class code. The Component Class Description for theResource displays. The Component Class is set up in the Cost Managementapplication and defaults from the Resource. Required.

14. The Cost Analysis Code and Cost Analysis Description for the Activitydisplays. This code defaults from the Activity.

Scheduling Information15. The Resource and its Description displays.

16. Select a Plan Type. You need to determine if this Resource is Auxiliary,Primary, or Secondary. Required.

� Select Auxiliary for resources that work as companions with the primaryresources to perform an activity in the Operation. These resources do notaffect the rate of the Operation. For example, a primary resource in amixing activity is a mixer with a throughput rate of 100 gallons per hour.An auxiliary resource is the worker who operates the mixer. No matter howfast or slow the worker is, the mixer rate remains at a constant 100 gallonsper hour.

� Select Primary to indicate that this is the rate determining resource. It limitsor determines throughput. It is also referred to as the bottleneck or criticalresource. There can only be one Primary per resource.

� Select Secondary to indicate the resource that would replace the primaryresource when it is not available. This resource performs the same task asthe primary resource, but can have a different usage.

Required.

17. Enter the Count as the number of resources needed for the activity entered. Forexample, it two blenders are used for mixing, enter a 2 in the count. Required.

18. Enter the Offset Interval as the time delay from the start of the activity to thepoint where the resource is actually required.

4-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 193: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Activity-Resource Details

19. Select the Scale Type. You can designate whether scaling is used to determineresource quantity. Scaling is defined as the proportional increase or decrease ofresources. For example, setup and cleanup activities are usually not scaled,while manufacturing activities are scaled.

� Select Proportional Scaling if the resources change in a ratio that isproportional to the quantity of material being processed.

� Select Fixed if the resources do not change, regardless of the quantity ofmaterial being processed.

� Select Fixed By Charge if the resources change as a result of the number ofcharges specified.

Process Parameters20. The Resource and its Description displays.

21. Enter Process Parameter 1 - 5. These fields are used for information only andhave no function behind them. The fields can be used for recording processinginformation about a resource such as operating speeds or temperatures.

Using folder technology, the field labels can be changed from the genericdescriptions of Process Parameter1, to an actual description of what is stored inthe field such as Speed (rpm). These fields also appear on the Recipe Detailswindow when you click the Organization Details button. For eachorganization, at the Recipe level, you can override the Process Parameter valuesthat default from the routing. For example, if an organization has differences inequipment that require different operating parameters, you can override them.

22. Save the window.

�� To edit a resource line:1. Select the appropriate Resource line.

2. Click Edit Resource Line to display the Operation Resource Line Edit window.

3. Make the appropriate changes to the line.

4. Save the window.

Operations 4-19

Page 194: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Operation Activity Line Summary

Displaying Operation Activity Line SummaryThe Operation Activity Line Summary window presents all pertinent informationthat is relevant to a specific operation line selected. Use this window to edit theselected activity line. To edit this information click Details to display theOperation-Activity Line Edit window.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save operations.

� Enter and save activities.

�� To display information about an operation activity line:1. Navigate to the Operation Activity Line Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Activity indicates the activity selected for this Operation.

� Description is a brief explanation of the activity.

� Factor is the process factor entered for the activity. Required.

� Offset Interval is the time required before the activity begins. In processoperations, this is usually the number of hours from the batch step start tothe start time of this activity.

3. Click Details to display the Operation Activity Line window.

4. Close the window.

�� To edit an operation activity line:1. Navigate to the Operation Activity Line window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Activity displays the activity selected for the Operation.

� Description is a brief explanation of the activity.

3. Enter the Factor as the process factor for the activity. Required.

4-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 195: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Operation Activity Line Summary

4. Enter the Offset Interval as the time delay from the start of the activity to thepoint where the resource is actually required.

5. Save the window.

Operations 4-21

Page 196: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Resource Line Summary

Displaying the Resource Line SummaryThe Operation Resource Line Summary window presents all pertinent informationthat is relevant to a selected operation-activity line.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save operations.

� Enter and save activities.

�� To display the resource line summary:1. Navigate to the Operation Resource Line Summary window.

Resource2. The following fields are display only:

� Resource displays the resource associated to the activity with itsDescription.

� Quantity displays the process amount for the Resource with QuantityUOM as its unit of measure.

� Usage displays the rate of use for the resource. Usage UOM is the unit ofmeasure for the Resource. This is usually specified in hours.

� Component Class and Class Description indicate the assigned componentclass for the Resource.

� Cost Analysis Code indicates the cost code assigned to the resource with itsassociated Cost Analysis Description.

� Plan Type displays whether this resource is a primary, secondary, orauxiliary resource. Auxiliary indicates resources that work as companionswith the primary resources to perform an activity in the Operation. Primaryindicates a the rate determining resource. Secondary indicates the resourcethat would replace the primary resource when it is not available. Thisresource performs the same task as the primary resource, but can have adifferent usage.

� Count indicates the number or quantity of the resource used in thespecified plant where you are defining production costs and usageavailability.

4-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 197: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Resource Line Summary

� Offset indicates the time delay from the start of the activity to the pointwhere the resource is actually required. This lag time is used by ProcessOperation Control.

� Scale Type displays which type of scaling is used to determine resourcequantity. Proportional scale type indicates the resources change in a ratiothat is proportional to the quantity of material being processed. Fixed scaletype indicates the resources do not change, regardless of the quantity ofmaterial being processed. Fixed By Charge indicates resources change as aresult of number of charges specified. With this type of scaling:

Resource Usage = Count multiplied by Usage multiplied by Charges

Process Parameters3. The following fields are display only:

� Resource indicates the Resource you are displaying.

� Process Parameter 1 - 5 displays the first through fifth Process Parameter.

�� To edit an operation resource line:1. Click Details to display the Operation Resource Line window where you can

edit individual Resource lines.

2. Resource displays the resource associated to the activity and its Description.

3. Enter the Quantity as the process amount for the Resource with Quantity UOMas its unit of measure. Required.

4. Quantity UOM displays the unit of measure for the Resource. Required.

5. Enter the Usage as actual usage of the Resource for the line. Required.

6. Usage UOM displays the unit of measure for the Resource. This is usuallyspecified in hours.

7. Enter the Component Class code. The Component Class Description for theResource displays. The Component Class is set up in the Cost Managementapplication and defaults from the Resource. Required.

8. Enter the appropriate Cost Analysis Code for the resource. Required.

9. Cost Analysis Description displays the description of the Cost Analysis Codefield.

10. Enter the Plan Type as:

Operations 4-23

Page 198: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Resource Line Summary

� Auxiliary to indicate the resources that work as companions with theprimary resources to perform an activity in the operation.

� Primary to indicate the rate determining resource. There can only be oneprimary per Resource.

� Secondary to indicate the resource that would replace the primary if it werenot available. This resource performs the same task as the primary, but canhave a different usage.

Required.

11. Enter Count as the planned number of resources for the activity. Countindicates the number or quantity of the resource used in the specified Plantwhere you define production costs and usage availability. Required.

12. Enter Offset as the time delay from the start of the activity to the point wherethe resource is actually required. Required.

13. Enter Scale Type as Proportional or Linear. Required.

4-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 199: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Resource Line

Editing a Resource LineThe Operation Resource Line window enables you to edit resource lines.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save operations.

� Enter and save activities.

�� To edit a resource line:1. Navigate to the Operation Resource Line window.

Resource2. Resource and its Description indicate the resource you are editing.

3. Enter the appropriate process Quantity. Required.

4. The Quantity UOM displays for the process quantity entered.

5. Enter the Usage as the rate of use for the Resource. This value is usuallyexpressed in hours or partial hours. For example, one hour and 15 minuteswould be entered as 1.25. Required.

Resource Usage = Count multiplied by Usage multiplied by Charges

6. Enter the Usage UOM as the unit of measure the resource is measured in thespecified plant. This is usually specified in hours. Required.

7. Enter the Component Class. The Class Description assigned to the ComponentClass displays. Required.

8. Enter the appropriate Cost Analysis Code for the resource. Required.

9. The Cost Analysis Descriptor associated with the Cost Analysis Code displays.

10. Plan Type indicates whether this Resource is an auxiliary, primary, orsecondary resource.

� Select Auxiliary for resources that work as companions with the primaryresources to perform an activity in the Operation. These resources do notaffect the rate of the Operation. For example, a primary resource in amixing activity is a mixer with a throughput rate of 100 gallons per hour.An auxiliary resource is the worker who operates the mixer. No matter how

Operations 4-25

Page 200: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing a Resource Line

fast or slow the worker is, the mixer rate remains at a constant 100 gallonsper hour.

� Select Primary to indicate that this is the rate determining resource. It limitsor determines throughput. It is also referred to as the bottleneck or criticalresource. It is recommended that the RUN-TIME activity’s resource beassigned this way.

� Select Secondary to indicate the resource that would replace the primaryresource when it is not available. This resource performs the same task asthe primary resource, but can have a different usage.

These fields are read only.

11. Enter the appropriate Count. This is the number or quantity of the resourceused in the specified plant where you are defining production costs and usageavailability. The number you enter depends on how broad a resourcecategorization you are defining. For example, if you define the resource asBlender 1, enter 1. If you use three blenders in the production line, and youdefine the resource as Blenders rather than defining each individually, enter 3.Required.

12. Enter the appropriate Scale Type. You can designate whether scaling is used todetermine resource quantity. Scaling is defined as the proportional increase ordecrease of resources. For example, setup and cleanup activities are usually notscaled, while manufacturing activities are scaled. This field defaults to Linearscaling.

� Select Proportional if the resources change in a ratio that is proportional tothe quantity of material being processed.

� Select Fixed if the resources do not change, regardless of the quantity ofmaterial being processed.

13. Enter the appropriate Offset as the time delay from the start of the activity tothe point where the resource is actually required. This lag time is used byProcess Operation Control.

Process Parameters14. Resource displays the resource you are editing.

15. Enter the appropriate Process Parameter 1 - 5.

16. Save the window.

4-26 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 201: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Ro

5

Routings

This topic shows you how to define and maintain routings. You are also shownhow to find a routing. A summary of routings and routing headers provides anoverview of the routings that are available. The processes of entering routing detailsand displaying the routing step line summary are explained. You are also shownhow to edit routing step lines, and how to enter routing step dependencies.Procedures for displaying and editing theoretical process loss are provided.

The following topics provide a basic understanding of routings:

� Understanding Routings

� Requirements

� Solutions

� Defining and Maintaining Routings

� Finding a Routing

� Displaying the Routings Summary

� Displaying the Routing Header Summary

� Entering Routing Details

� Displaying the Routing Step Line Summary

� Editing Routing Step Lines

� Entering Routing Step Dependencies

� Displaying Theoretical Process Loss

� Editing Theoretical Process Loss

utings 5-1

Page 202: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� Understanding the Routing Designer

� Using the Routing Designer

5-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 203: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Routings

Understanding RoutingsA routing is a sequenced set of operations that need to be performed to complete aproduction batch. The operations are presented in a series of steps that organizethese operations into an orderly set of activities that have individual resourcesassociated to them.

Routings are depicted hierarchically in the following diagram which shows the:

� Routing composed of a series of Operations organized in Steps.

� Operations composed of Activities containing Resources.

� Formula composed of Ingredient, Product, and possibly Byproduct.

� Recipe linking the Routing and Formula together with Processing Instructions.

Routings 5-3

Page 204: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

RequirementsFollowing are some requirements that customers have for routings in New ProductDevelopment. The answers are explained in detail in the Solutions topic.

Can a default routing be set up?Yes. Set up a default routing with average material. Material flow can be specifiedat the validity rule level. By having a default routing, the expected average materialthroughput is defined as a benchmark.

Can process loss be captured as a cost?Yes. Use Theoretical Process Loss to reflect a planned percentage of material that islost for a specific routing. Calculate the actual ingredient usage from a productionperspective, which accommodates for that loss in standard costing.

Does the application support automatic calculation of step quantitiesbased on material input and output?Yes. The application automatically calculates step quantities based on the amount ofmaterials input and output for each step.

Can manufacturing activities and routings be managed on themanufacturing floor?Yes. The Process Engineer workbench manages routings, operations, and recipes atthe shop floor level.

Is it possible to model when ingredients are relieved from inventory?Yes. The application provides three separate methods to update inventory:automatic release, manual release, and incremental release.

5-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 205: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

SolutionsNew Product Development provides solutions to help resolve issues at every stageof the product development process. The following represent some of the keyperformance solutions for routings.

Operations Throughput Enhanced by Default Routings Process speeds and feeds must beupdated at the item or step level to eliminate the need to have a unique routingwhenever the throughput varies by material viscosity or evaporation. Set up adefault routing with an average material throughput, while indicatingmaterial-specific flows at the validity rule level. By locating routing management inthis area, the larger corporate process engineering responsibilities are better definedand controlled.

Process Loss Factors Enable Better Material Planning Due to factors such as evaporationor changeovers, materials can be lost or unrecoverable in a production step. Theselost materials need to be planned for to achieve the targeted process quantity for astep. The loss can vary depending on the material being processed, therefore aproduction loss factor must be defined at a product operation level, and it must bereflected in production and planning for ingredients associated to the step. NewProduct Development allows entry of a process loss factor to enable better materialplanning.

Step Quantity Calculations Deliver Accurate Total Quantity Usage All step quantities arecalculated based on the routing step definitions and ingredient usage per step.Quantities are cumulative in that ingredients in step one are added to ingredients instep two. When byproducts or coproducts are yielded at the step they decrease thetotal step quantity. New Product Development accounts for this yield to deliver anaccurate total step usage.

Seamless Integration of Product Development Responsibilities In addition to the defaultRecipe Data Organizer, the Process Engineer can manage all routings, operations,and recipes as part of a seamless integration of all pertinent job functions on theshop floor.

Select the Appropriate Ingredient Release Method Release method specification enablesthe automatic release of ingredients after each step is completed, on a step by stepbasis using manual release, or using an incremental release to keep inventoryquantities current.

Routings 5-5

Page 206: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Routings

Defining and Maintaining RoutingsRoutings are defined in terms of operations. You enter and maintain the sequenceof operations and step quantities used in a routing. Define multiple versions for arouting that makes the same product to accommodate for several production lineswith differing characteristics. Since routings and operations are modeled into thestructure of a new recipe, several attributes are defined at the recipe level, includingplanned process loss, step quantity, capacity, and activity factor.

Since a single product can be associated with several routings on the manufacturingfloor, it can have different costs depending on the specified routing. New ProductDevelopment tracks the route that the ingredients follow, thereby trackingappropriate costs.

Creating a New RoutingCreate and define new routings on the Routing Details window. A routingrepresents the sequence of operations or steps used during the manufacturingprocess. Specify each of the operations in sequential order, with their respectivestep quantities, and total routing quantities. You can display the following windowsfrom the Routing Details window:

� Operation Details Activities

� Routing Step Dependencies

� Routing Step Line

Maintaining RoutingsUse the following windows to maintain routings:

� Routings Summary By... to display a list of defined routings with theirindividual version numbers and descriptions. These can be viewed by Class,Status, or Owner. You can display the Routing Details window from theRoutings Summary By... window.

� Routing Header Summary to display important descriptive information on aspecific routing. You can display the following windows from the RoutingHeader Summary window:

� Routing Details

� Theoretical Process Loss

5-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 207: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Routings

� Routing Step Line Summary to determine the step number, operation, stepquantity, and unit of measure for the step in a specific routing. You can displaythe Routing Step Line window from the Routing Step Line Summary window:

� Routing Step Dependencies to create and modify the interrelationships betweenrouting steps. Step dependencies are those relationships between steps thatestablish whether a specific step can or cannot start until another step iscompleted.

� Theoretical Process Loss to enter the theoretical percent loss expected for arange of material processed during a specified routing.

� Routing Step Line to edit individual routing step lines.

The following graphic depicts the previously described routing navigation flow:

Routings 5-7

Page 208: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Finding a Routing

Finding a RoutingThe Find Routings window enables you to find a specific routing.

Prerequisites� Enter and save routings.

�� To find a routing:1. Navigate to the Find Routings window.

2. Enter as many parameters as needed to complete the search:

� Enter search parameters in the Standard region for: Name, Version,Description, Class, or Product.

� Enter search parameters in the Advanced region to enter a specific: Item,Condition, or Value.

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of the search.

5. Close the window.

5-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 209: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Routings Summary

Displaying the Routings SummaryThe Routing Summary window displays a list of all defined routings with theirindividual version numbers and descriptions. You can view these by Class, Status,or Owner. You can display the Routing Details window from this window to viewspecific steps and operations associated with each of the routings displayed.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save routing classes.

� Enter and save routings.

� Use the View By list to select how you want to view the summary of routings.Select one of the following:

� Class to display the list by routing class.

� Status to display the list by routing status.

� Owner to display the list by routing owner.

�� To display a list of all defined routings:1. Navigate to the Routings Summary By... window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Routing displays the name of the routing.

� Version displays the version number of the Routing.

� Quantity displays the product Quantity associated with this Routing. Thisis the total Quantity from which individual step requirements are scaled.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the Quantity. This unit of measuredefaults from the process Quantity unit of measure entered on theOperation Details Activities window.

� Class displays the optional class entered for the Routing.

� Valid From displays the date on which the Routing is effective.

� Valid To displays the date on which the Routing is no longer effective.

� Status displays the current status of the Routing.

Routings 5-9

Page 210: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Routings Summary

3. Click Details to display the Routing Details window.

4. Close the window.

5-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 211: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Routing Header Summary

Displaying the Routing Header SummaryThe Routing Header Summary window displays important descriptive informationon a specific routing.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save routing classes.

� Enter and save routings.

�� To display a summary of routing headers:1. Navigate to the Routing Header Summary window.

2. Select the desired Routing.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Status displays the approval status of the Routing.

� Routing displays the code assigned to the Routing.

� Version displays the version number of the Routing.

� Description displays a brief explanation of the Routing.

� Valid From displays the date on which the Routing is effective.

� Valid To displays the date on which the Routing is no longer effective.

� Class determine the optional class assigned to the Routing.

� Class Description determine the optional class description assigned to theRouting.

� Theoretical Loss displays the theoretical quantity of material lost in theRouting.

� Planned Loss displays actual quantity of material lost in the Routing.

� Quantity displays the amount of material assigned to the displayedRouting.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the Quantity of material.

� Owner displays the initiator of the Routing.

4. Click Details to display the Routing Details window.

Routings 5-11

Page 212: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Routing Header Summary

5. Click Theoretical Process Loss to display the Theoretical Process Losswindow.

6. Close the window.

Using the View Menu to Find a RoutingThe Find selection on the View menu enables you to find a routing.

�� To find a routing from the View menu:1. Choose Find from the View menu. The Find Routings window displays.

2. Enter one or more of these search parameters:

� Status of the Routing.

� Routing Number code assigned to the Routing.

� Routing Version number assigned to the Routing.

� Description of the Routing.

� Routing Class assigned for classification of the Routing.

� Valid From date that the Routing is effective.

� To date that the Routing is no longer effective.

� Owner or initiator of the Routing.

� Routing Quantity as the amount of material assigned to the Routing in thedisplayed unit of measure.

� UOM as the unit of measure for the Routing Quantity.

� Process Loss as the planned loss of material for the Routing.

� Marked for Deletion enables you to select Yes to find routings marked forpurge or select No to find all routings not marked for purge.

3. Click Find.

5-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 213: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Details

Entering Routing DetailsThe Routing Details window enables you to enter the details for a specific routing.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save routing classes.

�� To enter routing details:1. Navigate to the Routing Details window.

2. Enter the code for the Routing. Required.

3. Enter a Routing Version of the Routing. Required.

4. After entering all relevant information and saving the Routing with the defaultStatus of New, return to this window if you need to change Routing Status byselecting Change Status from the Actions menu. Depending on whetherWorkflow is enabled, a different set of statuses is available.

Select a Status for the Routing you are entering from one of the following:

� Approved for Laboratory Use to indicate that the Routing is approved forlaboratory use.

� Approved for General Use to indicate that the Routing is approved for usein production.

� Obsolete/Archived to indicate that the Routing is no longer approved foruse and is obsoleted, archived, or both.

If Workflow is enabled, when you select:

� Approved for Laboratory Use, Status changes to Request Approval forLaboratory Use until all approvers have accepted the Routing, at whichtime its Status changes to Approved for Laboratory Use.

� Approval for General Use, Status changes to Request Approval forGeneral Use until all approvers have accepted the Routing, at which timeits Status changes to Approved for General Use.

Refer to the Understanding the Status Approval Workflow topic for additionalinformation.

5. Enter a Routing Description that briefly describes the Routing. Required.

Routings 5-13

Page 214: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Details

6. Enter a Class for the Routing to identify how it is categorized. The ClassDescription assigned to the Class displays.

7. Enter the Valid From date for this Routing. The default date is the currentsystem date. Required.

8. Enter a To date for the expiration of this Routing. If there is no expiration datefor this Routing, leave the field blank.

9. Enter the process Quantity for this Routing. This is the total quantity ofmaterial for the Routing, and is used to scale individual step requirements.Required.

10. Enter the process Quantity UOM associated with this Routing. The processQuantity UOM must interconvert with the UOM defined for TheoreticalProcess Loss based on the primary product UOM conversion in the Routing.Required.

11. Enter the Planned Loss for this Routing. This value is expressed as a percent.For example, a loss of 1.304% would be entered as 1.304.

12. The Theoretical Process Loss for this Routing displays. This value is entered onthe Theoretical Process Loss window, and is based on the value assigned to theClass associated with this Routing.

13. Enter the Owner to indicate the individual who is responsible for initiating thisRouting. Required.

14. Enter the Owner Organization to indicate the plant, laboratory, or other facilitythat is responsible for initiating this Routing. Required.

Routing Steps15. Enter the Step number to associate with an Operation in this Routing. It is

recommended that the first number in this sequence be 10, the second 20, andso forth. This enables you to add intermediate steps between 10 and 20 at a latertime. Required.

16. Enter the code for the Operation performed in this Routing. Required.

17. Enter a Version number for the Routing. Required.

18. The Description of the Operation entered displays.

19. Enter the Operation Step Quantity as the quantity of material associated withthis Step. The UOM for the Step Quantity displays.

20. Select the Release Type to indicate how the step is released as:

5-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 215: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Details

� Automatic if the step is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the step must be released and completed manually.

All steps are completed if the batch is completed, regardless of the step releasetype. Required.

21. Save the window.

22. Optionally, click Step Dependencies to display the Routing StepDependencies window.

23. Optionally, click Edit Operation to display the Operation Details Activitieswindow.

24. Optionally, click Edit Step Line to display Routing Step Line window.

�� To mark the routing for deletion:1. Choose Mark for Purge from the Actions menu.

2. The record is marked for deletion.

3. Save the window.

�� To edit the routing text:1. Choose Edit Text from the Actions menu.

2. Make the appropriate edits to routing text.

3. Save the window.

�� To display specifications:1. Choose Specifications from the Actions menu. The Specifications window

displays.

2. Evaluate specifications.

3. Close the window.

�� To display the quality control Samples window:1. Choose Samples from the Actions menu. The Samples window displays.

2. Evaluate the samples.

3. Close the window.

Routings 5-15

Page 216: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Details

�� To display the quality control Results window:1. Choose Results from the Actions menu. The Results window displays.

2. Evaluate the results.

3. Close the window.

�� To change the routing status:1. Choose Change Status from the Actions menu.

2. Change the Current Status displayed by selecting a different Status from theChange Status To list.

3. Click OK.

4. The Routing Details window displays the revised Status for the routing.

�� To generate step dependencies:1. Position the cursor in the routing header.

2. Choose Generate Step Dependencies from the Actions menu. A messagedisplays to indicate that the dependencies have been generated.

3. Click OK.

4. Select the dependent Step.

5. Click Routing Step Dependencies. The Routing Step Dependencies windowdisplays. Enter data as described in the Entering Routing Step Dependenciestopic.

�� To duplicate a record:1. Query the Routing Details record you want to duplicate.

2. Choose New from the File menu.

3. Choose Duplicate Record Above from the Edit menu.

4. Enter a new Routing name and Version number.

5. Save the window.

5-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 217: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Routing Step Line Summary

Displaying the Routing Step Line SummaryThe Routing Step Line Summary window enables you to determine the stepnumber, operation, step quantity, and unit of measure for the step in a specificrouting. You can go to the Routing Step Line window to edit individual lines.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save routing classes.

� Enter and save routings.

�� To display the routing step summary:1. Navigate to the Routing Step Line Summary window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Step Number displays the unique number for the step.

� Operation displays the name of the operation associated with the StepNumber.

� Operation Version displays the version number of the Operation.

� Operation Description displays a description of the Operation.

� Step Quantity displays the quantity of material being processed by thisstep.

� UOM displays the unit of measure associated with the Step Quantity.

� Step Release Type determines how the step is released, and displays:

– Automatic if the step is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

– Manual if the step must be released and completed manually.

All steps are completed if the batch is completed, regardless of the steprelease type.

3. Click Edit Line to display the Routing Step Line window to edit individualsteps.

4. Close the window.

Routings 5-17

Page 218: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Routing Step Lines

Editing Routing Step LinesThe Routing Step Line window enables you to edit individual step lines.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save routing classes.

� Enter and save routings.

�� To edit routing steps:1. Navigate to the Routing Step Line window.

2. Enter the desired Step Number. This number must be unique.

3. Enter the desired Operation to be associated to the Step Number displayed.Required.

4. Enter the desired Operation Version. Required.

5. The Operation Description displays.

6. Enter the desired Step Quantity. Required. The UOM displays the unit ofmeasure for Step Quantity.

7. Select the Step Release Type to indicate how the routing step is released:

� Automatic if the step is automatically released or completed whensubsequent steps are released or completed.

� Manual if the step must be released and completed manually.

All steps are completed if the batch is completed, regardless of the step releasetype. Required.

8. Save the window.

5-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 219: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Step Dependencies

Entering Routing Step DependenciesThe Routing Step Dependencies window enables you to create and modify theinterrelationships between routing steps. Step dependencies are those relationshipsbetween routing steps that establish whether a specific step can or cannot start untilanother step is completed. Routing Step Dependencies reduce the routingdevelopment time by establishing a default sequence for operation steps during aproduction run. Step dependencies are implemented at the routing maintenancelevel to enable automatic step quantity calculation in recipes.

You are able to define new dependencies or delete the ones you do not want. Forexample, if step 10 is BAKING and step 20 is the COOLING step, then step 10 mustbe completed before step 20 can begin. By this definition, step 20 is dependent onthe completion of step 10. Step dependencies are used to calculate planned starttimes however, they can be overwritten.

Any previous step must be validated against any routing currently being edited,and it must not be the same as the current step. Avoid defining circular references,for example Step 10 is less than Step 20 is less than Step 10.

Understanding Routing Step Dependency SelectionsStep Dependencies are definable as:

� Finish-to-start with no offset, to indicate that a process step begins immediatelyafter the completion of its preceding step. For example, a consecutive additionof ingredients is required without interruption.

� Finish-to-start with positive offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified period of time after the completion of its preceding step. For example,time is required to rest material before the addition of another ingredient.

� Finish-to-start with negative offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified period of time before the completion of its preceding step. Forexample, a production device needs to be activated before the addition of thenext ingredient.

� Start-to-start with no offset, to indicate that a process step begins at the sametime as the step it depends on. For example, there is a need for simultaneousaddition of ingredients without interruption.

� Start-to-start with positive offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified time after the beginning of its preceding step. This is similar tofinish-to-start with negative offset, but by specifying that the dependency is

Routings 5-19

Page 220: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Step Dependencies

start-to-start, you can ensure the positive offset is maintained if the previousdependent step finishes early.

The offset is defined in the Standard Delay field as a positive or negative number.The application uses step dependencies when individual steps are rescheduled.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save routings.

� Select a routing step to enter step dependencies.

�� To enter routing step dependencies:1. Navigate to the Routing Step Dependencies window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Routing displays the routing in which you want to set up stepdependencies.

� Routing Version number displays the version of the Routing.

� The Routing Description displays a brief explanation of the Routing.

� Routing Step displays the step number you selected for step dependencysetup.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Routing.

� Operation Version displays the version number of the Operation.

� Operation Description describes the Operation associated with theRouting.

Dependencies3. Enter the Previous Step that the currently selected step is dependent on. The

dependent step must immediately follow the Routing Step entered in this field.Required.

4. The Operation associated with the Routing Step displays.

5. The Version of the Operation associated with the Routing Step displays.

6. Select Dependency Type as:

5-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 221: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Routing Step Dependencies

� Start-to-start if the dependent step starts at the same time as the step onwhich it is dependent.

� Finish-to-start if the dependent step starts after the previous step ends. Forexample, when Step 2 is dependent on Step 1 and there is no specifiedoffset, Step 2 is scheduled to start when Step 1 finishes. If an offset of onehour is specified, Step 2 is scheduled to start one hour after Step 1 ends.You create overlapping steps by defining an Finish-to-start dependencywith a negative offset so that Step 2 starts before step 1.

Required.

7. Enter the Standard Delay as the standard number of hours from the end of thepreceding step to the start of the current step, or the start of the preceding stepto the start of the current step, depending on the Dependency Type entered.This field is used to calculate step start times. If you enter a value equal to zero,the step following the current step begins immediately after the step ends orstarts. You can enter a negative Standard Delay if the Dependency Type isFinish-to-start in order to create overlapping steps. Required.

8. Enter the Transfer Percent as the percentage of material that goes to thedependent step after all products and byproducts are yielded. This percentageis used to calculate the quantity of the dependent step if automatic stepquantity calculations are on. For example:

� If 40 percent of the material from the Previous Step comes into the currentBatch Step as a result of 60 percent of the material going to another step,enter 40 for the Transfer Percent.

� If 90 percent of the material from the Previous Step comes into the currentBatch Step as the result of 10 percent being lost to evaporation or beingretained by processing equipment, enter 90 for the Transfer Percent.Required.

9. Save the window.

Routings 5-21

Page 222: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Theoretical Process Loss

Displaying Theoretical Process LossTheoretical Process Loss can vary depending on the routing or the individualquantity being processed by a routing. This loss is defined at the routing level andis based on a minimum and maximum range of quantities.

The Theoretical Process Loss window enables you to enter the theoretical percentloss expected for a range of material processed during a specified routing. Forexample, if you mix a quantity of material up to 100 pounds, you could predict aloss of 1.50 percent theoretical process loss, or up to 1.5 pounds is lost. However, ifyou mixed a quantity between 100 and 500 pounds, you might predict a loss of 1.75percent theoretical process loss, or up to 8.75 pounds lost. The loss could beattributable to equipment, evaporation, or any other aspect of the routing thatwould not deliver the full quantity of material added.

Prerequisites� Enter and save routings.

� Enter and save routing classes.

� Optionally, enter and save routing step dependencies.

�� To display theoretical process loss:1. Navigate to the Theoretical Process Loss window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Routing Class displays the optional class assigned to the Routing.

� Description displays a brief description of the Routing Class.

Theoretical Process Loss3. The following fields are display only:

� Min Quantity displays the lower limit for which the displayed TheoreticalProcess Loss percent applies. Required.

� Max Quantity displays the upper limit for which the displayed TheoreticalProcess Loss percent applies. Required.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the minimum and maximumquantities.

� Process Loss displays the loss of process material for a range between theMin Quantity lower limit and Max Quantity upper limit.

5-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 223: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Theoretical Process Loss

Editing Theoretical Process LossThe Theoretical Process Loss Edit window lets you edit Theoretical Process Loss.

Prerequisites� Enter and save routings.

� Enter and save routing classes.

� Optionally, enter and save routing step dependencies.

��To edit theoretical process loss:

1. Navigate to the Theoretical Process Loss window.

2. Query the desired routing Class.

3. Enter the desired Min Quantity to specify the lower limit for which thedisplayed Theoretical Process Loss percent applies.

4. Enter the desired Max Quantity to specify the upper limit for which thedisplayed Theoretical Process Loss percent applies.

5. Enter the Theoretical Process Loss as a percent. For example, enter 1.32 for aTheoretical Process Loss of 1.32 percent.

6. Save the window.

Routings 5-23

Page 224: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Routing Designer

Understanding the Routing DesignerThe step dependency capability that is available on the Routing Details window letsyou establish the sequences in which routing steps occur throughout a productionrun. By establishing step dependency sequences, routing step quantities in therecipe are calculated automatically after the material and step associations aredefined.

The Routing Designer lets you define routing step dependencies using a visualnetwork of operations, steps, and activities. All the functions that the RoutingDesigner performs are accessible using the Routing Details window. The RoutingDesigner provides an alternate, and more intuitive option that can reduce routingdevelopment time.

The Routing Designer is one component of the Recipe Designer. It displays routingsteps in a hierarchical navigator structure. The Routing Designer can be used aloneor in conjunction with the Recipe Designer.

The Routing Designer provides a view of routing steps in three navigator styledisplay formats:

� Interleaved style, which positions operations, activities, and resources in aleft-to-right orientation for each routing with spatial adjustment for eachcomponent.

� Organization chart style, which positions operations, activities, and resources ina top-to-bottom orientation for each routing with spatial adjustment for eachcomponent as in an organization chart.

� Vertical style, which positions operations, activities, and resources in aleft-to-right orientation for each routing with no spatial adjustment for eachcomponent.

The drag-and-drop function lets you organize the step network to get a better viewof the sequence in which steps are run.

Understanding Step Dependency Type ConnectionsThe Connect button lets you connect routing steps to develop a routing stepnetwork. The shape and color of the line that connects two steps determine therelationship between the two steps.

Two step dependency types are:

� Finish-to-start, represented by a black, single segment, line connection. The lineoriginates at the end of an upstream step and points to the start of thedownstream step. The finish-to-start connection indicates the serial property of

5-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 225: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Routing Designer

the connected steps, since one step must complete before the step following itcan start.

� Start-to-start, represented by a blue, multisegment, connection line. The lineoriginates at the start of the upstream step and points to the start of thedownstream step. The start-to-start connection indicates the parallel property ofthe connected steps, since both steps start simultaneously.

Routings 5-25

Page 226: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

Using the Routing DesignerThe Routing Designer has two component panes:

� A navigator view of the routing. You can display or hide routing descriptionson the navigator. You can expand components on the navigator by clicking the+ sign, or you can collapse components on the navigator by clicking the - sign.Routing components include operations arranged in steps, activities, andresources.

� A routing graph view of the routing step dependencies. Each routing displayedin the pane is composed of a routing icon, step number, and routing code.

The Routing Designer lets you view or update a routing depending on theprivileges assigned to you.

Prerequisites� Enter and save routings.

�� To display the Routing Designer:1. Navigate to one of the following windows:

� Routing Summary

� Routing Header Summary

� Routing Details

2. Query the appropriate routing.

3. Click Designer. The Routing Designer window displays.

Identifying Buttons on the Routing DesignerThe following discussion and graphic identify and explain each of tools displayedon the Routing Designer tool palette:

� 1 is the Vertical Style button. Click it to display the vertical navigator style.Operations, activities, and resources are positioned in a left-to-right orientationfor each routing. There is no spatial adjustment for each component.

� 2 is the Interleaved Style button. Click it to display the interleaved navigatorstyle. Operations, activities, and resources are positioned in a left-to-rightorientation for each routing with spatial adjustment for each component.

� 3 is the Org-Chart Style button. Click it to display the organization chartnavigator style. Operations, activities, and resources are positioned in a

5-26 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 227: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

top-to-bottom orientation for each routing with spatial adjustment for eachcomponent.

� 4 is the Show/Hide Description button. Click it to display a description of thecomponents shown in the the navigator. Click it again to hide the description.

� 5 is the Save button. Click it to save the changes made on the Routing Designer.This option is not available if the Routing Designer is in the view mode.

� 6 is the Refresh button. Click it to refresh the routing graph pane with dataretrieved from the database.

� 7 is the Exit button. Click it to exit from the Routing Designer workbench.

� 8 is the Drag Mode button. Click it to move steps around the graph pane usingthe drag-and-drop operation. This option is not available if the RoutingDesigner is in view mode.

� 9 is the Connect Mode button. Click it to build dependencies between stepsusing the drag-and-drop operation. This option is not available if the RoutingDesigner is in view mode.

� 10 is the Help button. Click it to display online help for the current window.

The following is a graphic of the previously described tool palette buttons:

�� To show or hide a routing description using the View menu:1. Choose Show Description from the View menu to display routing information.

2. The routing code, routing version, and description display for each routing.

3. Choose Show Description from the View menu again to hide routinginformation.

�� To create a new dependency connecting two routing steps:1. Click Connect to begin building dependencies between two steps. This option

is not available if the Routing Designer is in view mode.

Routings 5-27

Page 228: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

2. Click the source or starting step in the routing graph pane.

3. Drag the dependency line to the target step, and drop it.

4. The Routing Step Dependency Properties window displays. To override thedefault step dependency attributes, reenter them.

5. Click OK.

6. The application checks the desired connection:

� If a circular reference is detected, then the application displays:

A Circular reference has been detected.

The step dependency is not created.

� If a step dependency already exists, then the application displays:

Step dependency already exists.

The step dependency is not created.

7. Save your work.

�� To remove a step dependency between two routing steps:1. Right-click the line connecting two routing steps, then choose Delete.

2. The line connecting the two routing steps is removed.

Using the Routing Properties WindowThe Routing Properties window displays information about the routing, includingits status, version, description, and its valid dates of use. The planned loss androuting quantity are also displayed.

�� To display the Routing Properties window:1. There are two methods to display the Routing Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the routing to display the pop-up menu, thenchoose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the routing, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Status displays the current status of the Routing.

5-28 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 229: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

� Routing displays the name of the routing.

� Version displays the version number of the routing.

� Description displays a brief description of the routing.

� Valid From displays the first date and time that the routing is valid.

� Valid To displays the last date and time the routing is valid.

� Class displays the class assigned to the routing.

� Description displays a description of the routing class.

� Planned Loss displays the planned loss. It defaults to the theoreticalprocess loss unless otherwise specified.

� Quantity displays the quantity of material associated to the routing with itsUOM.

3. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Routing Step Properties WindowThe Routing Step Properties window displays a summary of the step and itsdependencies. The Step Summary tab lets you view the main attributes of a specificstep. The Step Dependencies tab lets you display upstream and downstream stepsand their individual attributes.

�� To display the Routing Step Properties window:1. There are three methods to display the Routing Step Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the routing step, then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the routing step, then choose Properties from theView menu.

� In the routing graph pane, double-click the routing step.

Step Summary2. The following fields are display only:

� Step displays the number of the selected routing step. You cannot edit thisfield.

� Operation displays the operation code for the selected routing step.

� Version displays the version of the operation for the selected routing step.

Routings 5-29

Page 230: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

� Description displays a description of the operation for the selected routingstep.

� Class displays the class code of the operation if an operation class isassociated to the routing step.

� Description displays a description of the class if an operation class isassociated to the routing step.

� Quantity displays the quantity of the selected routing step in the routingand its UOM.

� Max Capacity displays the maximum capacity of the routing step.

� Charges displays the number of charges in the routing step.

Step Dependencies3. Select one of the following from the list:

� Incoming Steps to display incoming dependencies of routing steps that areupstream to the currently selected routing step.

� Outgoing Steps to display outgoing dependencies of routing steps that aredownstream to the currently selected routing step.

4. The following fields are display only and depend on the selection you make instep 3:

� Step displays the routing step number of the upstream or downstreamrouting step.

� Operation displays the operation code of the upstream or downstreamrouting step.

� Version displays the operation version of the upstream or downstreamrouting step.

� Quantity displays the quantity of the upstream or downstream routing stepand its UOM.

� Transfer % displays one of the following:

– If Incoming Steps is selected, then it is the percentage of the routing stepquantity that transfers from the routing step shown in the list to the selectedrouting step.

5-30 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 231: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

– If Outgoing Steps is selected, then it is the percentage of the routing stepquantity that transfers from the selected routing step to the routing stepshown in the list.

� Transfer Quantity displays one of the following:

– If Outgoing Steps is selected, then it is the routing step quantity thattransfers from the selected routing step to the routing step shown in the list.

– If Incoming Steps is selected, then it is the routing step quantity thattransfers from the routing step shown in the list to the selected routing step.

5. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Activity Properties WindowThe Activity Properties window displays the properties of the selected activityincluding a brief description, the activity factor, and the optional offset interval.

�� To display the Activity Properties window:1. There are two methods to display the Activity Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the activity, then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the activity, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

The Activity Properties window displays.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Activity displays the activity code.

� Description displays a description of the activity.

� Factor displays the activity factor.

� Offset Interval displays the activity offset interval.

3. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Resource Properties WindowThe Resource Properties window has two tabs:

� Resource Summary displays the main attributes of a specific resource.

Routings 5-31

Page 232: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

� Process Parameters displays the process parameters defined for the selectedresource.

�� To display the Resource Properties window:1. There are two methods to display the Resource Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the resource then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the resource, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

The Resource Properties window displays.

Resource Summary2. The following fields are display only:

� Resource displays the resource code.

� Description displays a description of the resource.

� Quantity displays the resource quantity and its UOM.

� Usage displays the resource usage and its UOM.

� Class displays the resource class.

� Description displays the resource class description.

� Plan Type displays:

– Auxiliary for a resource that works with the primary resource to performan activity.

– Primary for a rate determining resource that limits or determinesthroughput. It is also referred to as the bottleneck or critical resource.

– Secondary for a resource that would replace the primary resource when itis not available. This resource performs the same task as the primaryresource, but can have a different usage.

� Count displays the number of resource instances used.

� Offset displays the value entered for Standard Delay.

� Scale Type displays the scale type used.

5-32 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 233: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

Process Parameters3. Process Parameters 1 - 5 are for information only and have no function behind

them. The fields are used for recording processing information about a resourcesuch as operating speeds or temperatures.

4. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Routing Step Dependency Properties WindowThe Routing Step Dependency Properties window displays the source anddestination step dependency properties. It also displays the dependency type,standard delay, transfer percent, and transfer quantity. Step Dependency propertiesinclude a dependency type and an offset defined by the value entered for StandardDelay. The offset is defined in the Standard Delay field as a positive or negativenumber. The application uses step dependencies when individual steps arerescheduled. Dependency type and standard delay offsets are:

� Finish-to-start with no offset, to indicate that a process step begins immediatelyafter the completion of its preceding step. For example, a consecutive additionof ingredients is required without interruption.

� Finish-to-start with positive offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified period of time after the completion of its preceding step. For example,time is required to rest material before the addition of another ingredient.

� Finish-to-start with negative offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified period of time before the completion of its preceding step. Forexample, you need to activate a production device before the addition of thenext ingredient.

� Start-to-start with no offset, to indicate that a process step begins at the sametime as the step it depends on. For example, there is a need for simultaneousaddition of ingredients without interruption.

� Start-to-start with positive offset, to indicate that a process step begins aspecified time after the beginning of its preceding step. This is similar tofinish-to-start with negative offset, but by specifying that the dependency isstart-to-start, you can ensure the positive offset is maintained if the previousdependent step finishes early.

�� To display the Routing Step Dependency Properties window:1. There are three methods to display the Routing Step Dependency Properties

window:

Routings 5-33

Page 234: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

� In the right pane, click the starting routing step and hold down the leftmouse button as you draw a connection line to the target routing step.Release the left mouse button. This prompts you to validate or override thedefault values displayed for the routing step dependency attributes.

� In the right pane, double-click the line connecting two routing steps.

� In the right pane, right-click the line connecting two routing steps, thenchoose Properties .

Source2. The following fields are display only:

� Step displays the routing step number of the source routing.

� Operation displays the operation code of the source operation.

� Version displays the version of the source operation.

� Description displays a description of the source operation.

� Quantity displays the source routing step quantity.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the step quantity.

Destination3. The following fields are display only:

� Step displays the routing step number of the destination operation.

� Operation displays the operation code of the destination operation.

� Version displays the version of the destination operation.

� Description displays a description of the destination operation.

� Quantity displays the destination routing step quantity and its UOM.

Dependency Type4. Select one of the following:

� Finish-to-start for operations that begin immediately after the completionof the previous routing step, or with a specified standard delay. This is thedefault that you can override.

� Start-to-start for operations that begin at the same time, or with a specifiedstandard delay.

5-34 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 235: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

5. Standard Delay displays the positive or negative time offset between routingsteps. It is the number of hours from the end of the source routing step to thestart of the destination routing step. The default is zero. You can enter a valueto override the default.

6. Transfer % displays the percentage of material that goes to the dependentrouting step after all products and byproducts are yielded. This percentage isused to calculate the quantity of the dependent routing step if automaticrouting step quantity calculations are on. You can enter a value to override thedefault.

7. Transfer Quantity displays the quantity transferred from the source routingstep to the destination routing step and its UOM. It is calculated as:

Transfer Quantity = Routing Step Quantity * Transfer %

8. Click OK to close the window.

�� To display a full description of a routing step:Position the cursor over a routing step in the graph to display a full description ofthe routing step.

�� To display the transfer percentage of a routing step:Position the cursor over a routing step dependency line to display the transferpercentage of material.

Routings 5-35

Page 236: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Routing Designer

5-36 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 237: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Re

6

Recipes

This topic shows you how to define and maintain recipes. You are shown how tofind a recipe. You are also shown how to display a summary of recipes and recipeheaders. Procedures to enter recipe details, recipe organization details, and editvalidity rules demonstrate the process flow for recipe development. You learn howto display and interpret recipe validity rules and how to display the recipe step andmaterial association.

The following topics provide a basic understanding of recipes:

� Understanding Recipes

� Requirements

� Solutions

� Defining and Maintaining Recipes

� Finding a Recipe

� Displaying the Recipes Summary

� Displaying the Recipe Header Summary

� Understanding Step Quantity Calculations

� Entering Recipe Details

� Entering Recipe Organization Details

� Entering Multi-Record Recipe Validity Rules

� Editing Recipe Validity Rules

� Displaying Validity Rules By Product

cipes 6-1

Page 238: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� Displaying Validity Rules By Recipe

� Displaying the Recipe Step/Material Association

� Understanding the Recipe Designer

� Using the Recipe Designer

6-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 239: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Recipes

Understanding RecipesRecipes standardize the structure of all information that describes production ofone or more products. Recipes have:

� Formulas that define the relationship of material resources (products,ingredients, and byproducts).

� Routings that define the relationships of nonmaterial resources (labor andequipment operations with activities and their associated resources). Routingsare optional.

� Processing instructions that encompass the work instructions needed toproduce the products.

To provide the greatest flexibility to process manufacturers, formulas and routingsare built independently. They are linked using a Recipe that has validity rules.Different formulas can use the same routing, or one formula can be associated toseveral different routings.

Recipes are depicted hierarchically in the following diagram that shows the:

� Routing composed of a series of Operations organized in Steps.

� Operations composed of Activities containing Resources.

� Formula composed of Ingredient, Product, and possibly Byproduct.

� Recipe linking the Routing and Formula together with Processing Instructions.

Recipes 6-3

Page 240: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

RequirementsFollowing are some requirements that customers have for recipes in New ProductDevelopment. The answers are explained in detail in the Solutions topic.

Does the application support effectivities already developed forin-house formulas?Yes. Migrate Effectivities to Recipe Validity Rules with special scripts provided byOracle.

Is there one place in the application that shows exactly how to make aproduct?Yes. Use the Recipe Details window. After evaluating the information on the RecipeDetails window, display Organization Details, Validity Rules, and the Recipe Stepand Material Association needed to determine exactly how to make a product.

Does a New Product Development recipe support cost managementand production execution requirements?Yes. By linking input and output of materials to individual operation steps andproviding an automatic step quantity and charge calculation, the applicationsupports the requirements for accurate cost rollup and flexible productionexecution.

Can an item be made differently depending on the manufacturing plantor the time of year?Yes. Recipes enable rule based execution. By applying this logic to formulaselecting, plant specific and seasonal formulations are possible.

Does the application support SP88 terms for batch manufacturing?Yes. The application offers enhanced standards for Master Recipe definition.

6-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 241: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

SolutionsNew Product Development provides solutions to help resolve issues at every stageof the product development process. The following represent some of the keyperformance solutions for recipes.

Migrate Effectivities with Scripts Oracle provides a customized series of scripts thatmigrate existing formula information into the New Product Developmentapplication.

Use the Recipe Details Window to Determine All Product Manufacturing Requirements TheRecipe Details window displays all product manufacturing requirements. In eachstep of building a new product, components are created that appear on the RecipeDetails or the Organization Details windows.

Use Recipes as the Foundation for Cost Management and Production Execution Whereroutings are used to specify process related requirements such as equipment, labor,and energy, the recipe defines the input and output of each operation step. This isachieved by linking formula materials and quantities to appropriate routing steps,and is a prerequisite to enabling automatic step calculation.

Enhance Product Consistency with Rule-Based Execution If not managed appropriately,manufacturing variability can lead to product inconsistency and complexity.Rule-Based Execution enhances product consistency and manufacturing simplicityby letting planners, quality control specialists, and cost accountants specify theconditions under that recipe components must be applied. When a recipe is neededfor production, planning, or costing purposes, the application selects theappropriate version to support the activity. This capability improves consistency byapplying rule-based logic to formula selection for use in specific environments andunder specific conditions based on status.

New Product Development uses Validity Rules that are based on several key factorsincluding date, production site, plant, customer, and required quantities. Somerecipes are seasonal and based on ingredient availability. Other recipes aredetermined by whether they are small, medium, or large production runs. Differentplants can use different versions of a target recipe, so the choice of recipe dependson the plant that is producing the batch. By using Validity Rules an organizationcan set the standard quantity and effective dates of a recipe to specify what, where,when, and how formulas, recipes, routings, and operations must be applied.

Recipes 6-5

Page 242: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

With rule-based execution, production gains a tighter control over the business andis able to select an optimized recipe. When several recipes have overlappingvalidity dates, business logic selects the optimum valid recipe.

Offer Enhanced Industry Standards for Recipe Definition The concept of effective date isrefined into a recipe structure that complies with industry standards for recipedefinition. A Master Recipe combines a formula and a routing at a global level tostreamline the overall approval process. The Master Recipe serves as the basis forsubsequent planning, manufacturing, costing, and regulatory calculations.

6-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 243: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Recipes

Defining and Maintaining RecipesRecipes contain the minimum set of information that uniquely defines themanufacturing requirements for a specific product. Recipes provide a way todescribe products and how those products are produced.

Creating a New RecipeCreate and define new recipes on the Recipe Details window. To create a newrecipe, you have the option to specify product code and quantity, or formulanumber and version. If you enter product code and quantity, you get a list of allvalid or effective formulas. Select the one you want to use to create the recipe. Youalso have the option to specify a routing in the recipe. You can override routingattributes such as Capacity, Activity Factor, Charges, and Resource Usage for eachrecipe you define. If a recipe is set up for Automatic Step Quantity Calculation, thenyou must ensure that formula material is properly associated to each appropriaterouting step. You can display the following windows from the Recipe Detailswindow:

� Recipe Organization Details

� Recipe Validity Rules

� Recipe Step/Material Association

Maintaining RecipesUse the following windows to maintain recipes:

� Recipes Summary By... to display a list of defined recipes with their individualversion numbers and descriptions. These can be viewed by Status or Owner.You can display the Recipe Details window from the Recipes Summary Bywindow.

� Recipe Header Summary to display important descriptive informationregarding a particular recipe. You can display the following windows from theRecipe Header Summary window:

� Recipe Validity Rules

� Recipe Details

� Recipe Organization Details to display and, if necessary, override informationdefined for specific operations and routings at the Organization level. You candisplay the Recipe Validity Rules window from the Recipe Organization Detailswindow.

Recipes 6-7

Page 244: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Defining and Maintaining Recipes

� Recipe Validity Rules is a multi-record window to enter or edit a complete listof Validity Rules for Organizations you can access.

� Recipe Validity Rules also enables you to edit validity rules for a specific recipe.

� Recipe Step/Material Association to display all items from the recipe’s formulaand associate them with specific routing steps.

The following graphic depicts the previously described recipe navigation flow:

6-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 245: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Finding a Recipe

Finding a RecipeThe Find Recipes window enables you to find a specific recipe. At least one searchparameter needs to be entered.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

�� To find a recipe:1. Navigate to the Find Recipes window.

2. Enter as many parameters as needed to complete the search:

� Enter search parameters in the Standard region for: Recipe, Description,Formula, Routing, or Product with appropriate Version for Recipe,Formula, or Routing. You can also enter Organization, Customer, FromDate, To Date, Status, and Recipe Use.

� Enter search parameters in the Advanced region for a specific: Item,Condition, or Value.

3. Click Find.

4. Review the results of the search

5. Close the window.

Recipes 6-9

Page 246: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Recipes Summary

Displaying the Recipes SummaryThe Recipes Summary window displays a list of all defined recipes with theirindividual version numbers and descriptions. You can display these by Status orOwner. Multilingual support is provided for the Recipe Description.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

� Use the View By list to select how you want to view the summary of recipes.Select one of the following:

� Status to display the list by recipe status.

� Owner to display the list by recipe owner.

�� To display a list of all defined recipes:1. Navigate to the Recipes Summary By... window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Recipe is the recipe code.

� Version is the version of the Recipe.

� Description is a brief explanation of the Recipe.

� Status displays the current status for the Recipe.

� Product displays the code for the primary product produced by the Recipe.

� Owner Organization displays the default organization for the Owner of theRecipe.

3. The following fields display for each selected recipe.

� Formula is the formula for the currently selected Recipe.

� Formula Version is the Version of the Formula for the currently selectedRecipe.

� Routing is the Routing for the currently selected Recipe.

� Routing Version displays the Version of the Routing for the currentlyselected Recipe.

4. Click Details to display the Recipe Details window.

6-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 247: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Recipe Header Summary

Displaying the Recipe Header SummaryThe Recipe Header Summary window enables you to display important descriptiveinformation regarding a particular recipe.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

�� To display recipe header information:1. Navigate to the Recipe Header Summary window.

Summary2. The following fields are display only:

� Status is the current status of the Recipe.

� Recipe is the name of the Recipe.

� Version is the version of the Recipe.

� Description is a brief explanation of the Recipe.

� Formula is the Formula number used in the Recipe.

� Version is the version of the Formula with its Description.

� Main Product is the end item in the Formula.

� Total Output Qty is the total output of material in the Formula UOM.

� Routing is the routing number.

� Version is the Routing version with its Description.

3. Click Products to display the Formula Product Summary window.

4. Click Details to display the Recipe Details window.

Validity Rules5. The following fields are display only:

� Organization displays the plant or laboratory organization code.

� Product displays the coproduct of the Formula.

Recipes 6-11

Page 248: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Recipe Header Summary

� Recipe Use displays if the Recipe is used in Production, Planning, Costing,Regulatory, or Technical class and subclass determination.

� Status displays the Status of the Validity Rules.

6. Click Details to display the Recipe Validity Rules window.

Customers7. The following fields are display only:

� Customer displays the customer number.

� Name displays the customer name.

6-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 249: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Step Quantity Calculations

Understanding Step Quantity CalculationsThe quantity of material required in a specific step is dependent on the weight ofmaterial that passes into and out of that step. Input material consists of ingredientsthat are injected directly into steps or material that is transferred from precedingsteps.

The following example shows how material can be input, transferred, and outputfrom a series of production steps.

Step 1: Add 10 pounds of Ingredient 1 to 25 pounds of Ingredient 2. The result is 5pounds of Byproduct 1 and 30 pounds of Intermediate 1. Transfer of Intermediate 1is as follows:

� 25% or 7.5 pounds to Product 1

� 35% or 10.5 pounds to Step 2

� 40% or 12 pounds to Step 3

Step 2: Transfer of 10.5 pounds of Intermediate 2 is as follows:

� 25% or 2.625 pounds to Step 3

� 75% or 7.785 pounds to Product 1

Step 3: Add 12 pounds of Ingredient 3 to the mixture of Intermediate 1 andIntermediate 2. This yields 3 pounds of Byproduct 2 and 23.625 pounds ofIntermediate 3.

The final yield of Product 1 consists of:

� 7.500 pounds from Step 1

� 7.785 pounds from Step 2

� 23.625 pounds from Step 3

Total Product 1 produced is 39 pounds.

Total Byproduct produced is 8 pounds, and is comprised of:

� 5 pounds of Byproduct 1

� 3 pounds of Byproduct 2

In this example, there is yield is 100%. There is no process loss in the transfer ofmaterial.

Recipes 6-13

Page 250: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Step Quantity Calculations

The following depicts the previously described example. LB is equal to pounds.

6-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 251: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

Entering Recipe DetailsThe Recipe Details window enables you to enter the details for a specific recipe. APlant or a Laboratory can be associated with all the materials and resourcesrequired to make a product at the recipe level. One or more customers can beassociated to the recipe for informational purposes.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Optionally, enter and save operations.

� Optionally, enter and save routings.

� Enter and save formulas.

Understanding Step Quantity CalculationsWhen you select the Calculate Step Qty box on the Recipe Details window, theapplication checks to determine if there are proper step quantity materialassociations. You must use a routing. Step and material associations must be made.If any of these associations are defective, then you receive an error message. Whenyou use the Automatic Step Quantity Calculation, it checks quantities in each stepto verify that material is available to pass into and out of each step. The quantity ofmaterial for a particular step is dependent on the quantity of material that passesinto or out of it. The input material can be either the ingredient that is injecteddirectly into the step, or it can be the output of preceding steps. Output isrepresented typically by coproducts or byproducts.

�� To enter recipe details:1. Navigate to the Recipe Details window.

2. Enter the code for the Recipe to be entered. Required.

3. Enter a Version of the Recipe. Required.

4. Enter a Description for the Recipe. Required.

5. After entering all relevant information and saving the Recipe with the defaultStatus of New, return to this window if you need to change Recipe Status byselecting Change Status from the Actions menu. Depending on whetherWorkflow is enabled, a different set of statuses is available.

Select a Status for the Recipe you are entering from one of the following:

Recipes 6-15

Page 252: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

� Approved for Laboratory Use to indicate that the Recipe is approved forlaboratory use.

� Approved for General Use to indicate that the Recipe is approved for usein production.

� Obsolete/Archived to indicate that the Recipe is no longer approved foruse and is obsoleted, archived, or both.

If Workflow is enabled, when you select:

� Approved for Laboratory Use, then Status changes to Request Approvalfor Laboratory Use until all approvers have accepted the Recipe, then itsStatus changes to Approved for Laboratory Use.

� Approval for General Use, then Status changes to Request Approval forGeneral Use until all approvers have accepted the Recipe, then its Statuschanges to Approved for General Use.

Recipe status cannot be changed to an approved status if the formula androuting are not yet approved. For example, the formula and routing must beApproved for General Use before the recipe status can be changed to Approvedfor General Use. If you change the status of a recipe to Obsolete, Archived,On-hold, or Frozen, validity rules associated to that recipe change to that status.

6. Enter the main Product for the Formula associated with this Recipe. If you entera new Recipe, enter the Formula to fill this field automatically.

7. The Output Quantity displays the sum of all materials. UOM indicates the unitof measure for the Formula associated with this Recipe.

8. Enter the Formula number for the Recipe. Required. Once a recipe is saved, thisfield cannot be edited. You cannot use an inactive Formula in a recipe. Theformula Version displays. Required.

9. Creation Organization displays the organization code for the initial Owner.This field is not updateable for an existing Recipe. Required.

10. Enter a Routing number for the Recipe. A routing can be added to an existingRecipe. The Version for the Routing entered displays.

11. Theoretical Process Loss displays the hypothetical loss of process materialassociated to a routing as a percentage. If no routing is associated to a recipe, orif no routing class is associated to a given routing, and no Process Loss isdefined for that routing, this field is blank.

12. Enter the Planned Process Loss as the loss of process material observed duringproduction of a batch using the recipe. If no value is entered in this field, it

6-16 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 253: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

defaults to the Theoretical Process Loss. You can change this value on a New orexisting recipe.

13. Total Output Qty displays with its UOM.

14. Enter the Laboratory that has current ownership of the recipe.

15. Enter the Owner Organization. This field is the default organization for theOwner of the Recipe. In order for you to enter or edit information for theRecipe, you must have an association with this organization and permission toaccess and change this field. Required.

16. Enter the Owner of the Recipe. The Owner name must be a valid User name.This field defaults to the current User. Required.

17. The Calculate Step Qty check box indicates whether you want to enter stepquantities manually or have the application calculate them for you.

� Select the Calculate Step Qty check box to enable the application tocalculate step quantities automatically. Quantities are based on the amountof materials that go into and out of each supported step. Step Quantityfields cannot be entered after you select the check box. You must associateall items marked as contributing to step quantity to specific Steps on theRecipe Step/Material Association window.

� Clear the Calculate Step Qty check box to enter step quantities manually.Step quantities default from the default routing steps. You can change anyof the quantities in the Step Quantity region. Upon making an entry in theStep Quantity field, the application checks to determine if preceding stepshave been set up for the current step dependencies. If quantities are lessthan the sum of the Quantity transferred to this step, an appropriate errormessage displays.

Plant/Laboratory18. The following fields are display only:

� Organization displays the Organization code that the Process Loss is beingdefined for. This must be a plant or a laboratory. Required.

� Organization Name displays a description of the plant or laboratory.

� Type indicates whether this is a plant or a laboratory.

Note: You must enter all information on this window before youselect the Calculate Step Qty check box.

Recipes 6-17

Page 254: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

� Process Loss displays the material that is lost through the process. Thisfield is blank if you did not enter a Routing. This field allows you tooverride the default Process Loss.

Customer19. Enter the Customer number. Required.

20. Name indicates the name of the Customer associated with the Customernumber entered.

Step QuantityIf a routing has not been entered, this region is not available. If you calculate stepquantities in the Automatic Step Quantity Calculation, the Step MaterialAssociations need to be entered.

21. Step indicates the step number associated with the listed Operation in thedisplayed Routing. Steps cannot be added or deleted here. However, if a step isdeleted in the base routing used for this Recipe, and the Step field isoverwritten, you must choose Delete from the Edit menu to delete theorphaned Step. Charges are calculated for each Step displayed. You canassociate text with each Step.

22. Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion and Description are displayed.

23. Step Quantity indicates the default quantity of material associated with theStep. The UOM for the Step Quantity displays. You can enter a new value inthe Step Quantity field if you do not use the Automatic Step QuantityCalculation. If Automatic Step Quantity Calculation is used, this field is notenterable. Required if the Step is associated to material, and you are not usingAutomatic Step Quantity Calculation. Required.

24. Charges displays the total calculated charges for the step. Charges are thenumber of times the Operation must be performed to complete the Step for thespecified Step Quantity. For example, a mixer that holds 50 kg would requiretwo charges to process 100 kg of material. Charges are calculated from thesmallest minimum capacity for all resources in the Step.

25. Optionally, click Organization Details to display the Recipe OrganizationDetails window.

26. Optionally, click Validity Rules to display the Recipe Validity Rules window.

27. Optionally, click Step/Material Association to display the RecipeStep/Material Association window.

6-18 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 255: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

28. Save the window.

�� To mark a recipe for deletion:1. Choose Mark for Purge from the Actions menu.

2. The record is marked for deletion.

3. Save the window.

�� To copy a recipe:1. Select the Recipe to copy.

2. Choose Copy from the Edit menu. Copying a recipe creates a new recipe. Allheader fields in the the new recipe are editable. You must change the recipenumber or recipe version in the copied recipe before saving it. Duplicate recipenames are not allowed. The current Owner and Organization are assigned tothe new recipe. Recipes that have been marked for deletion cannot be copied.

3. Click OK.

�� To edit text:1. Choose Edit Text from the Actions menu.

2. Enter appropriate text.

3. Save the window.

�� To edit regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to edit regulatory iteminformation. You can only retrieve regulatory item information from the mainproduct.

1. Retrieve data from the main product.

2. Choose Regulatory Item Information from the Actions menu.

� If you select an item that has been defined as a regulatory item, the ItemInformation navigator displays for the regulatory item.

� If you select an item that is associated to a regulatory item through theMaster Items Association window, the screen displays "The item isassociated with the master item." Click OK to display the Item Informationnavigator for the master item.

Recipes 6-19

Page 256: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

� If you select an item that has no regulatory item information entered, theNew Regulatory Item window displays for you to define the item as aregulatory item.

3. Edit regulatory item information as described in the Oracle ProcessManufacturing Regulatory Management User’s Guide.

4. Save the window.

�� To display regulatory item information:Only the Formulator responsibility has the ability to display regulatory iteminformation. The procedure to display regulatory item information is the same asthe procedure to edit regulatory item information except that you do not edit theinformation, and you do not save the window; you close it.

�� To duplicate a record:1. Query the Recipe Details record you want to duplicate.

2. Choose New from the File menu.

3. Choose Duplicate Record Above from the Edit menu.

4. Enter a new Recipe name and Version number.

5. Save the window.

�� To display the Formula Details window:1. Choose Formula from the Actions menu.

2. The Formula Details window displays.

�� To display the Routing Details window:1. Choose Routing from the Actions menu.

2. The Routing Details window displays.

Using the View Menu to Find a RecipeThe Find selection on the View menu enables you to find a recipe. At least onesearch parameter needs to be entered.

�� To find a recipe from the View menu:1. Navigate to the Recipe Details window.

6-20 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 257: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Details

2. Choose Find from the View menu.

3. Enter search parameters for: Recipe, Version, Description, Status, Product,Description, Formula, Version, Routing, Version, Owner, OwnerOrganization, Laboratory, or Marked for Deletion.

4. Click Find.

Recipes 6-21

Page 258: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Organization Details

Entering Recipe Organization DetailsThe Recipe Organization Details window enables you to display and, if necessary,override information defined for specific operations and routings at the plant orlaboratory level.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

�� To enter recipe organization details:1. Navigate to the Recipe Organization Details window. The Find Recipe

Organization Details window displays.

2. Enter the Organization that owns the recipe. Required.

3. Click Find.

4. The following fields are display only:

� Organization indicates the code for the Plant or Laboratory that owns therecipe.

� Type displays Plant if the Organization is a plant, or a Laboratory if theOrganization is a laboratory.

� Organization Name displays the description assigned to the Organization.This field defaults to the entry from the Recipe Details window. Required.

� Planned Process Loss displays the loss of process material observed duringproduction of a batch using the recipe as a percentage. You can enter andsave a different Planned Process Loss value for the recipe used in theOrganization displayed. This value defaults to the Theoretical Process Losswhen no entry is made on the Recipe Details window.

� Theoretical Process Loss displays the hypothetical loss of process materialassociated to a routing. If no routing is associated to the recipe, this field isblank.

Validity Rules5. Enter a Product for the formula used in the recipe. Required.

6-22 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 259: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Organization Details

6. Recipe Use displays if the recipe is used in Production, Planning, Costing,Regulatory, or Technical when it is used to define technical classes andsubclasses. Required.

7. Enter the From Date as the date the Validity Rule becomes effective. The datemust be within the effective date for any routing associated to the recipe.Required.

8. Enter To Date as the date to stop using the Validity Rule. This is an optionalfield and must be left blank if no expiration date is defined for the ValidityRule.

9. Status displays the status of the Validity Rule entered on the Recipe ValidityRules window.

10. Enter the Std Qty as the the usual quantity of product produced by the ValidityRule. Required.

11. Enter the UOM as unit of measure for the standard quantity. Required.

12. Enter the Min Qty as the minimum quantity of material that is allowable by theValidity Rule. Required.

13. Enter the Max Qty as the maximum quantity of material that is allowable by theValidity Rule. Required.

14. Enter the Preference number for the Validity Rule. When more than oneformula can be used to produce the same product, the Preference field is usedto show the Validity Rule that must be used first, second, third, and so forth.Preference defaults to 1. Required.

Activities15. The following fields are display only:

� Step indicates the step number associated with the listed Operation. Stepscannot be added or deleted here.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion and Description are displayed.

� Activity displays the Activity associated with the Operation. The ActivityDescription is displayed.

16. Enter Factor as the number of times the Activity is performed in the displayedOperation. This value can change when resources that are specific to theOrganization are associated with ingredients. Required.

Recipes 6-23

Page 260: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Organization Details

Capacity17. The following fields are display only:

� Step indicates the step number associated with the listed Operation. Stepscannot be added or deleted here.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion is displayed.

� Activity displays the activity associated with the Operation. Activitiescannot be added or deleted here.

� Resources displays the Resource associated to each displayed Activity.

18. The following fields display and can be edited:

� Min Capacity displays the minimum throughput amount per capacity unitas defined on the Resources window.

� Max Capacity displays the maximum throughput amount per capacity unitas defined on the Resources window.

19. UOM displays the unit of measure for both Min Capacity and Max Capacity.

Throughput20. The following fields are display only:

� Step indicates the step number associated with the listed Operation. Stepscannot be added or deleted here.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion is displayed.

� Activity displays the activity associated with the Operation. Activitiescannot be added or deleted here.

� Resources displays the Resource associated to each displayed Activity.

21. Process Qty displays the total quantity of material for the Step with its UOM.You can enter and save a different Process Qty.

22. Usage displays the unit of the Resource used to perform the activity on thedisplayed Step. The Usage UOM displays. You can enter and save a new Usagequantity.

Process Parameters23. The following fields display only:

6-24 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 261: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Recipe Organization Details

� Step indicates the step number associated with the listed Operation. Stepscannot be added or deleted here.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion is displayed.

� Activity displays the activity associated with the Operation. Activitiescannot be added or deleted here.

� Resources displays the Resource associated to each displayed Activity.

24. Parameter 1 - 5 displays Process Parameter 1 - 5, respectively. These fields canbe edited. You have the ability to use the Folder technology to change thegeneric Process Parameter fields to more meaningful field names.

25. Save the window.

Using the Find Recipe Organization Details WindowThe Find Recipe Organization Details window displays when you navigate to theRecipe Organization Details window.

�� To find the recipe organization:1. Enter the Organization that owns the recipe. Required.

2. The Name of the Organization displays.

3. Click Find.

Recipes 6-25

Page 262: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Multi-Record Recipe Validity Rules

Entering Multi-Record Recipe Validity RulesThe Recipe Validity Rules Multi-Record window lets you enter or edit a completelist of Validity Rules for organizations you can access. Validity Rules provide acombination of a quantity of material and an effective date that is used byproduction, planning, costing, regulatory, or technical in one or more specifiedorganizations. Validity Rules that have been marked for deletion are notupdateable. Validity Dates are ordered by Organization, Product, Recipe Use, andStart Date.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

�� To view multi-record recipe validity rules:1. Navigate to the Recipe Validity Rules window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Formula displays the formula used in the recipe with its Version andDescription.

� Routing displays the routing used in the recipe with the routing Versionand Description.

3. Organization displays the organization that owns this Validity Rule to produceproducts. This can be your plant or laboratory. When left blank, this fieldenables the Validity Rule to be global. You can enter and save a newOrganization.

4. Enter a Product for the Validity Rule. The Product Description field displays.Required.

5. Select Recipe Use as:

� Production for use in production of products.

� Planning for use in planning material consumption.

� Costing for use in establishing costs.

� Regulatory for use in regulatory management.

� Technical for use in establishing technical classes and subclasses.

6-26 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 263: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Entering Multi-Record Recipe Validity Rules

Required.

6. Enter the Preference number for the Validity Rule. When more than oneformula can be used to produce the same product, Preference is used to showthe Validity Rule that must be used first, second, third, and so forth. Required.

7. Enter the From Date as the date the Validity Rule becomes effective. The datemust be within the effective date for any routing associated to the recipe.Required.

8. Enter To Date as the date to stop using the Validity Rule. This is an optionalfield and must be left blank if no expiration date is defined for the ValidityRule.

9. Enter the Standard Quantity of Product made with this Formula. This quantityis only used for costing. It does not restrict quantities that can be produced bythe Formula displayed. The standard quantity must be in the specified rangedefined by the minimum and maximum quantities. Required.

10. Enter the UOM for the Standard Quantity. Required.

11. Enter the Min Quantity as the minimum quantity of Product that can be madeusing the Formula. Required.

12. Enter the Max Quantity as the maximum quantity of Product that can be madeusing the Formula. Required.

13. Save the window.

Recipes 6-27

Page 264: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Recipe Validity Rules

Editing Recipe Validity RulesThe Recipe Validity Rules window lets you edit validity rules for a specific recipe.Use this window to apply global or specific organization rules to batches, costmanagement, planning, regulatory, or technical data when producing the sameproduct. Validity Rules can be added, updated, or marked for deletion.

You can use folders and flexfields with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’sGuide and Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide, respectively.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

�� To edit recipe validity rules:1. Navigate to the Recipe Validity Rules window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Formula displays the formula used in the recipe with its Version andDescription.

� Routing displays the routing used in the recipe with the routing Versionand Description.

� Status displays the Status of the Validity Rule. This field cannot be higherthan its associated recipe. For example, a Validity Rule cannot be Approvedfor General Use until the recipe associated to it is Approved for GeneralUse.

3. Organization displays the organization that owns this Validity Rule, and theOrganization Description. This must be your Plant or Laboratory. You canenter and save a new Organization.

Validity Rule4. Select Recipe Use as:

� Production for use in production of products.

� Planning for use in planning material consumption.

� Costing for use in establishing costs.

� Regulatory for use in regulatory management.

� Technical for use in establishing technical classes and subclasses.

6-28 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 265: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Editing Recipe Validity Rules

Required.

5. Enter a Product in the Formula for the Validity Rule. The Product Descriptionfield displays. Required.

6. Enter the Preference number for the Validity Rule. When more than oneformula can be used to produce the same product, the Preference field is usedto show the Validity Rule that must be used first, second, third, and so forth.Preference defaults to 1. Required.

For example, one formula can be used to produce between 10 and 150 gallons ofa product. Another formula can be used to produce between 100 and 1000gallons of the same product. Since either formula can be used to produce 100 to150 gallons of material, the Preference field shows the suggested order of use.Lower numbers indicate a higher Preference. The number 1 indicates thehighest Preference.

Quantities7. Enter the Standard quantity of product made with this Formula. This quantity

is only used for product costing. It does not restrict quantities that can beproduced with the Formula. Standard defaults to the quantity provided in theFormula displayed. Required.

8. UOM is the unit of measure for the standard quantity. You can enter and save adifferent unit of measure. Required.

9. Enter the Minimum quantity of product that can be made using the Formula.Minimum defaults to 1. Required.

10. Enter the Maximum quantity of product that can be made using the Formula.Required.

Effective Dates11. Enter the From date as the date the Validity Rule becomes effective. The date

must be within the effective date for any routing associated to the recipe.Required.

12. Enter To date as the date to stop using the Validity Rule. This is an optionalfield and must be left blank if no expiration date is defined for the ValidityRule.

13. Save the window.

Recipes 6-29

Page 266: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Validity Rules By Product

Displaying Validity Rules By ProductThe Validity Rules Summary by Product window allows you to specify underwhich circumstances a recipe can be used. This window displays only if there ismore than one validity rule available. Validity rules provide a combination ofmaterial quantities and a range of effective dates used by production and planningin one or more specified organizations. This window only displays validity rulesthat have not expired.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

� Enter and save validity rules.

�� To select a validity rule by product:1. Navigate to the Validity Rules Summary By Product window.

2. The Find Validity Rules By Product window displays.

3. Enter the desired product item in the Find field.

4. Click Find. The window displays all recipes found for the item.

5. The following fields are display only:

� Recipe displays the recipe that is the basis of the validity rule.

� Version displays the Recipe version.

� Recipe Description displays a brief description of the Recipe.

� Organization displays the organization for which the validity rule can beused. This field is blank if any organization can use the validity rule.

� Formula displays the formula associated with the Recipe.

� Formula Version displays the version of the Formula.

� Formula Description displays a brief description of the Formula.

� Routing displays the routing associated with the Recipe.

� Routing Version displays the version of the Routing.

� Routing Description displays a brief description of the Routing.

� Product displays the product code for the primary product used in theRecipe.

6-30 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 267: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Validity Rules By Product

� Product Description displays a description of the primary product.

� Recipe Use displays the intended use for the recipe. Firm Planned Orderscan use Production or Planning validity rules.

� Preference displays the preference number for the Validity Rule. Whenmore than one formula can be used to produce the same product, thePreference field is used to show the the order of preference for a validityrule. Lower numbers are preferred. For example, a preference of 2 is higherthan a preference of 5.

� Start Date displays the first date the validity rule can be used.

� End Date displays the last date the validity rule can be used. When thisfield is blank, there is no specified end date.

� Standard Quantity displays the standard quantity of material used forcosting the formula. It does not restrict quantities that can be produced bythe formula.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the Quantity fields.

� Min Quantity is the minimum quantity of product that can be made usingthe recipe.

� Max Quantity is the maximum quantity of product that can be made usingthe recipe.

6. Select the validity rule you want to use.

7. Click OK.

Recipes 6-31

Page 268: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Validity Rules By Recipe

Displaying Validity Rules By RecipeThe Validity Rules Summary by Recipe window allows you to specify under whichcircumstances a recipe can be used. This window displays only if there is more thanone validity rule available. Validity rules provide a combination of materialquantities and a range of effective dates used by production and planning in one ormore specified organizations.

This window only displays validity rules that have not expired.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

� Enter and save validity rules.

�� To select a validity rule by recipe:1. Navigate to the Validity Rules Summary By Recipe window.

2. The Find Validity Rules By Recipe window displays.

3. Enter the desired recipe in the Find field.

4. Click Find. The window displays all recipes found for the item.

5. The following fields are display only:

� Recipe displays the recipe that is the basis of the validity rule.

� Version displays the Recipe version.

� Recipe Description displays a brief description of the Recipe.

� Organization displays the organization for which the validity rule can beused. This field is blank if any organization can use the validity rule.

� Formula displays the formula associated with the Recipe.

� Formula Version displays the version of the Formula.

� Formula Description displays a brief description of the Formula.

� Routing displays the routing associated with the Recipe.

� Routing Version displays the version of the Routing.

� Routing Description displays a brief description of the Routing.

� Product displays the product code for the primary product used in theRecipe.

6-32 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 269: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying Validity Rules By Recipe

� Product Description displays a description of the primary product.

� Recipe Use displays the intended use for the recipe. Firm Planned Orderscan use Production or Planning validity rules.

� Preference displays the preference number for the Validity Rule. Whenmore than one formula can be used to produce the same product, thePreference field is used to show the the order of preference for a validityrule. Lower numbers are preferred. For example, a preference of 2 is higherthan a preference of 5.

� Start Date displays the first date the validity rule can be used.

� End Date displays the last date the validity rule can be used. When thisfield is blank, there is no specified end date.

� Standard Quantity displays the standard quantity of material used forcosting the formula. It does not restrict quantities that can be produced bythe formula.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the Quantity fields.

� Min Quantity is the minimum quantity of product that can be made usingthe recipe.

� Max Quantity is the maximum quantity of product that can be made usingthe recipe.

6. Select the validity rule you want to use.

7. Click OK.

Recipes 6-33

Page 270: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Recipe Step/Material Association

Displaying the Recipe Step/Material AssociationThe Recipe Step/Material Association window displays all items from the recipeformula and lets you associate these items with specific routing steps.

You can use folders with this window. See: Oracle Applications User’s Guide.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

� If the Automatic Step Quantity Calculation is used:

– A routing must be associated with the recipe.

– Each item marked as contributing to step quantity must be associated witha step, and have a conversion specified between the standard mass unit ofmeasure and standard volume unit of measure.

– All operations must use a mass or volume unit of measure.

�� To display recipe step/material associations:1. Navigate to the Recipe Step/Material Association window.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Formula displays the formula used in a recipe with the Version andFormula Description.

� Routing displays the routing used in a recipe with the Version andRouting Description.

Associations� Step displays the step number associated with the listed Operation in the

displayed Routing. You cannot add a Step to a routing on this window. Youmust do this on the Routing Details window. Required.

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion is displayed.

� Step Qty displays the default quantity of material associated with the Step.The UOM for the Step Quantity displays.

Note: Data appearing on this window is entered and saved using theRecipe Details window.

6-34 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 271: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Displaying the Recipe Step/Material Association

� Line displays the Line number for each product, byproduct, or ingredientlisted. Required.

� Item displays the code associated with each product, byproduct, oringredient listed.

� Type displays the type of Line associated in the Step as a product,byproduct, or ingredient.

� Item Qty displays the Quantity of product, byproduct, or ingredientyielded by the listed Formula.

� Line UOM displays the unit of measure for the Item Quantity.

3. Close the window.

�� Editing the association of materials and steps:1. Enter the Step from the LOV. Required.

2. The following fields are display only:

� Operation displays the operation associated with the Step. The operationVersion is displayed.

� Step Qty displays the default quantity of material associated with the Step.The UOM for the Step Quantity displays.

3. Enter the Line from the LOV. Required.

4. The following fields are display only:

� Item displays the code associated with each product, byproduct, oringredient listed.

� Type displays the type of Line associated in the Step as a product,byproduct, or ingredient.

� Item Qty displays the Quantity of product, byproduct, or ingredientyielded by the listed Formula.

� Line UOM displays the unit of measure for the Item Quantity.

5. Save the window.

Recipes 6-35

Page 272: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Recipe Designer

Understanding the Recipe DesignerThe Recipe Designer displays:

� Process requirements, including routing steps, activities, and resources.

� Material requirements, including the input of ingredients and output ofproducts and byproducts.

� Process instructions.

All functions that the Recipe Designer performs are accessible using the RecipeDetails window. The Recipe Designer provides an alternate, and more intuitiveoption that can reduce recipe development time.

Recipe Designer ComponentsThe Recipe Designer window has three major components:

� A navigator located in the top left pane that displays:

� A resource view of the recipe containing the resources used in activities foroperations that comprise the routings.

� A material view of the recipe. This view displays items used in the recipeformula.

Three navigator style formats are available:

� Interleaved style, which positions recipe components in a left-to-rightorientation for each recipe with spatial adjustment for each component.

� Organization chart style, which positions recipe components in atop-to-bottom orientation for each recipe with spatial adjustment for eachcomponent as in an organization chart.

� Vertical style, which positions recipe components in a left-to-rightorientation for each recipe with no spatial adjustment for each component.

� A display of formula items in the bottom left pane has tabs that let you select allitems, or filter out only products, byproducts, or ingredients. For each type ofitem you can display those that are associated to steps, or those that are notassociated to steps. You can also display a combination of those that areassociated to steps and those that are not associated to steps.

� A right pane that displays two views selected from tabs located at the bottom ofthe pane:

6-36 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 273: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Recipe Designer

� Process Instruction Sheet view that combines routing information thatincluding process requirements, and formula details that include inputrequirements and output requirements.

� Step Dependency Graph view that depicts the step dependencies within therouting associated to the recipe. All steps in the routing are displayed, andare represented as an graphic image. Below each image is a step number,operation code, and operation version. When you position the cursor over astep, text displays the complete description of that step. When you positionthe cursor over a line dependency that links two routing steps, text displaysthe transfer percentage between the routing steps.

The graphics that appear as nodes on the navigator are also used to identify theRecipe Designer components. Button graphics are described in the "Using theRecipe Designer" topic.

Understanding the Navigator PaneThe navigator pane has a Material View and a Resource View. The Resource View isdiscussed in the "Understanding the Routing Designer" topic, since it is the same asthat option. The Material View displays the information about the items associatedto the routing step.

Understanding the Formula Item PaneThe Formula Item pane lists all items in a formula. Click the Show/Hide FormulaItems button to display or conceal the Formula Item pane. The Formula Item panehas several tabs that allow you to display a list of items by product, byproduct, oringredient. Within each tab, you can view all items, items that are associated torouting steps, or items that are not associated to routing steps.

Associating an Item to a Routing StepThe specification of material input and material output for each step in a recipe isrequired if production and consumption of materials are controlled at the step level.The Formula Item pane lets you select one or more items and assign them to arouting step in the navigator or on the routing step dependency graph using thedrag-and-drop operation. This function is available when the View UnassignedItems option is selected on the Formula Item pane.

Redistributing a FormulaWhen you select the Material View, you get all items associated to a step byexpanding the related node in the navigator. Then, by using the drag-and-drop

Recipes 6-37

Page 274: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Recipe Designer

operation or a cut and paste operation, you can move items from one routing stepto another. The Process Instruction Sheet tab on the right pane automatically reflectsall changes you make.

Using Automatic Step and Number of Charges CalculationThe routing step quantities and the number of charges are calculated and updatedautomatically on the Process Instruction Sheet pane when you change an item andstep association. The calculation is performed when you select Calculate StepQuantities.

Understanding the Process Instruction SheetThe Process Instruction Sheet provides process engineers and formulators with theability to display, develop, and maintain material and routing step associations aswell as the process instructions for a specific recipe. It provides navigator views ofrouting steps in interleaved, organization chart, or vertical display styles. It alsopresents multiple views of items in the formula.

The Process Instruction Sheet lets you:

� Assign formula items to routing steps using a drag-and-drop operation.

� Perform automatic step quantity and number of charge calculations.

� Redistribute formula items from one step to another step using a drag-and-dropoperation.

� Display process instructions defined at the formula item level and at therouting step level.

� Create, maintain, and view process instructions at the routing step, and at theitem and step association level.

� Combine process requirement inputs and production execution outputs withina single set of process instructions.

� View the properties of recipes, routings, routing steps, operations, activities,resources, and items at the product, ingredient, and byproduct levels.

Editing Process Instruction TextYou access the Process Instruction Text Editor from the right-mouse menu or theTools menu. Process instructions are created and maintained for a specific operationitem or step association row, or for a particular step in the recipe. Standard processinstructions that are defined in the formula at the item level, or in the routing at thestep level cannot be edited at the recipe level. Process instructions are stored in the

6-38 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 275: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding the Recipe Designer

standard text table against the paragraph code defined in the GMD: ProcessInstruction Paragraph profile option.

Differentiating Standard from Specific Process InstructionsStandard process instructions that are common to all recipes are defined in theformula or in the routing. Text is then displayed in the Process Instruction Sheetpane, however this text cannot be edited in the pane.

Standard process instructions that are maintained at the step level in the routingdisplay under the routing step line. Display or hide process instructions byexpanding or collapsing the corresponding routing step line. Process instructionsdefined at the step level for this particular recipe are displayed. The processinstructions defined at the recipe level display with a yellow background todistinguish between the standard instructions that are defined at the routing leveland the specific instructions that are defined at the recipe level.

Recipes 6-39

Page 276: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

Using the Recipe DesignerThe Recipe Designer has these components:

� A navigator view of the recipe in the top left pane. Display or hide descriptionson the navigator. You can expand components on the navigator by clicking the+ sign, or you can collapse components on the navigator by clicking the - sign.The navigator has a Material View and a Resource View that selectivelydisplays materials such as products, byproducts, and ingredients, or routingscomposed of operations arranged in steps, activities, and resources.

� A Formula Item view of the recipe in the bottom left pane.

� A Process Instruction Sheet or a Step Dependency Graph in the right pane,depending on the tab selected.

Depending on the status of the recipe, the Recipe Designer is in update or viewmode. You have the same update or view privileges for the Recipe Designer as youhave for the Recipe Details window.

Prerequisites� Enter and save recipes.

� Define a paragraph code for process instructions using the GMD: ProcessInstruction Paragraph profile option. By default, the Recipe Designer uses PI asthe default paragraph code.

�� To display the Recipe Designer:1. Navigate to one of the following windows:

� Recipe Details

� Recipe Summary By...

� Recipe Header Summary

2. Query the appropriate recipe.

3. Click Designer. The Recipe Designer window displays.

Identifying Buttons on the Recipe DesignerThe following discussion and graphic identify and explain each of tools displayedon the Recipe Designer tool palette:

6-40 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 277: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

� 1 is the Vertical Style button. Click it to display the vertical navigator style.Recipe components are positioned in a left-to-right orientation. There is nospatial adjustment for each component.

� 2 is the Interleaved Style button. Click it to display the interleaved navigatorstyle. Recipe components are positioned in a left-to-right orientation withspatial adjustment for each component.

� 3 is the Org-Chart Style button. Click it to display the organization chartnavigator style. Recipe components are positioned in a top-to-bottomorientation with spatial adjustment for each component.

� 4 is the Find button. Click it when the Edit Process Instructions window isdisplayed to display the Find Text Token window. Text tokens are codes orshort descriptions that represent longer descriptions or messages. These tokensare set up on the Text Token window. Refer to the Oracle Applications SystemAdministration User’s Guide for a complete discussion on the creation and use ofText Tokens.

� 5 is the Show/Hide Description button. Click it to display a description of thecomponents shown in the the navigator. Select it again to hide the description.

� 6 is the Save button. Click it to save the changes made on the Recipe Designer.This option is not available if the Recipe Designer is in View mode.

� 7 is the Refresh button. Click it to refresh the panes with data retrieved from thedatabase.

� 8 is the Exit button. Click it to exit from the Recipe Designer workbench.

� 9 is the Show/Hide Formula Items button. Click it to display the Formula ItemPane. Select it again to hide the Formula Item Pane.

� 10 is the Drag Mode button. Click it to move steps around the graph pane usingthe drag and drop operation. This option is not available if the Recipe Designeris in View mode, or if the Process Instruction Sheet tab is selected.

� 11 is the Connect Mode button. Click it to build dependencies between stepsusing the drag-and-drop operation. This option is not available if the RecipeDesigner is in view mode.

� 12 is the Help button. Click it to display online help for the current window.

� 13 is the Calculate Step Quantities box. Click it to calculate step quantitiesautomatically. Clear the box to indicate that steps are not calculatedautomatically.

The following is a graphic of the previously described toolbar buttons:

Recipes 6-41

Page 278: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

Setting Up the GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph Profile OptionMany windows in Oracle Process Manufacturing applications let you associate textwith a record of the edited document. For example you can attach text to a specificingredient line in a formula. In this application, paragraphs are structures that areused to store and categorize text. The standard application has the General Textparagraph as the one default paragraph stored for each database table.

In order to provide the Recipe Designer with a means to distinguish betweenProcess Instructions and other text types, your system administrator needs to definea paragraph code for process instructions. Text displayed in the Process InstructionSheet in the Recipe Designer is the text defined for the paragraph code specified bythe GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph profile option.

Refer to the Oracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide and the Oracle ProcessManufacturing System Administrator User’s Guide for additional information.

Using the Resource ViewThe Resource View is described in the "Understanding the Routing Designer" topic.In the navigator, select Resource View to display the Resource View.

Using the Material ViewThe Material View in the navigator displays the information about the itemsassociated to the routing step. The following attributes are shown:

� Item number

� Item description

� Item quantity and unit of measure

�� To select the Material View:In the navigator, select Material View. The Material View displays.

Using the Material View WindowsThe Material View has three item properties windows:

6-42 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 279: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

� Ingredient Properties

� Product Properties

� Byproduct Properties

�� To display the Ingredient Properties window:1. In the navigator, select Material View.

2. There are two methods to display the Ingredient Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the ingredient node, then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the ingredient, and choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

3. The following fields are display only, and their options are explained in the"Entering Formula Details" topic:

� Line displays the formula line number for the ingredient.

� Item displays the item code associated with the ingredient.

� Description displays a brief description of the ingredient. This defaultsfrom the Item Master table.

� Quantity displays the amount of ingredient that the formula requires. Thequantity entered in this field is the default standard quantity used for therecipe. It can be changed at the recipe level.

� Release Type displays how the ingredient line is released.

� Scale Type displays the ingredient scale type. Refer to the "ScalingFormulas" topic for advice.

� Phantom Type displays whether or not the ingredient is a phantom andhow it is exploded.

� Contribute To Step Quantity indicates whether this ingredient is takeninto account by the step quantity calculations.

� Scrap Factor is the anticipated amount of ingredient lost in themanufacturing process as a percentage.

� Required Quantity displays the result of multiplying the Formula Quantityby the quantity one plus the Scrap Factor expressed as a percent. itrepresents the planned quantity plus the scrap.

4. Click OK to close the window.

Recipes 6-43

Page 280: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

�� To display the Product Properties window:1. In the navigator, select Material View.

2. There are two methods to display the Product Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the recipe node, then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the product, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

3. The following fields are display only, and their options are explained in the"Entering Formula Details" topic:

� Line displays the formula line number for the product.

� Item displays the product code for each item produced by the formula. Ifthe formula code entered is the same as an item code, then that item code isdisplayed as the default in this field.

� Description displays a brief description of the product. This defaults fromthe Item Master table.

� Quantity displays the quantity of product that the formula yields. Thequantity entered in this field is the default standard quantity used for therecipe with its UOM.

� Release Type displays how the product line is released.

� Scale Type displays the product scale type. This can only be Fixed orProportional, since Integer scale type does not apply to products. Refer tothe "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Contribute To Step Quantity indicates whether the line contributes to thestep quantity.

� Cost Allocation Percentage indicates the percentage of the total cost that isassigned to this product.

4. Click OK to close the window.

�� To display the By-Product Properties window:1. In the navigator, select Material View.

2. There are two methods to display the By-Product Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the byproduct, then choose Properties.

6-44 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 281: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

� In the navigator, click the byproduct, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

3. The following fields are display only, and their options are explained in the"Entering Formula Details" topic:

� Line displays the formula line number for the byproduct.

� Item the byproduct code for each item produced by the formula.

� Description displays a brief description of the byproduct. This defaultsfrom the Item Master table.

� Quantity displays the quantity of byproduct that the formula yields. Thequantity entered in this field is the default standard quantity used for therecipe with its UOM.

� Release Type displays how the byproduct line is released.

� Scale Type displays the byproduct scale type. This can only be Fixed orProportional, since Integer scale type does not apply to byproducts. Refer tothe "Scaling Formulas" topic for advice.

� Contribute To Step Quantity indicates whether the line contributes to thestep quantity.

4. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Formula Item PaneThe Formula Item pane displays a list of items included in the recipe.

�� To display items in the formula item pane:1. If the Formula Item pane is not displayed, then click Show/Hide Formula

Items. A pane showing all items in the formula displays below the navigator.

2. Select View Assigned/Unassigned Items.

3. The following columns display all items in the formula by ascending formulaline number:

� Type indicates if the formula item is a product, byproduct, or ingredient.

� Line No displays the formula line number.

� Item displays the item code for the formula item.

Recipes 6-45

Page 282: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

� Description displays a brief description of the item. This defaults form theItem Master table.

� Quantity displays the default standard quantity of the item used for theformula.

� UOM displays the unit of measure for the item.

� Step indicates the line number associated to the item listed. The stepnumber does not display for unassigned items.

4. Click OK to close the window.

�� To filter items by product, byproduct, or ingredient:1. If the Formula Item pane is not displayed, then click Show/Hide Formula

Items. A pane showing all items in the formula displays below the navigator.

2. Click one of the following tabs to filter items in the recipe:

� All Items to display products, byproducts.

� Products to display only products.

� By-products to display only byproducts.

� Ingredients to display only ingredients.

�� To display assigned and unassigned item components:1. If the Formula Item pane is not displayed, then click Show/Hide Formula

Items. A pane showing all items in the formula displays below the navigator.

2. Select one of the following to display assigned, unassigned, or both assignedand unassigned items:

� View Assigned to display only those items that are assigned to a routingstep.

� View Unassigned to display only those items that are not yet assigned to arouting step.

� View Assigned/Unassigned to display all items that are assigned or not yetunassigned to a routing step.

�� To activate or disable automatic step calculation:1. Select Automatic Step Calculation. The following message displays:

Do you want to delete the current calculated step quantities? Y/N

6-46 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 283: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

� Click Yes to delete recipe step quantities from the database and ProcessInstruction Sheet. The sheet is updated with the default step quantities inthe routing.

� Click No to retain the current calculated step quantities.

2. Clear Automatic Step Calculation to disable automatic step calculation.

�� To define material input and output for a step:1. In the navigator, select Material View.

2. If the Formula Item pane is not displayed, then click Show/Hide FormulaItems. A pane showing all items in the formula displays below the navigator.

3. Select Unassigned Items. The list of all items that are not assigned to aparticular step displays.

4. Associate one or more items to a particular step by dragging the items in theFormula Item pane and dropping them onto a particular step either in the StepDependency Graph or the navigator.

5. If Automatic Step Calculation is selected, then the step quantities and thenumber of charges are calculated, and the Process Instruction Sheet panedisplays the revisions.

�� To redistribute formula items:1. From the top left pane, select Material View.

2. Use one of the following techniques to redistribute an item:

� Drag the item in the navigator, and drop it onto a target routing step in thenavigator, or in the Step Dependency Graph.

� Click the item to redistribute. From the Edit menu, choose Cut. Then, selectthe the target routing step in the navigator, or in the Step DependencyGraph. From the Edit menu, choose Paste.

3. Optionally, select Automatic Step Quantity Calculation to calculate anddisplay the step quantities and the number of charges on the Process InstructionSheet pane.

4. Save your work.

�� To cut an item from a formula:1. From the top left pane, select Material View.

Recipes 6-47

Page 284: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

2. Expand the recipe to display the item you want to cut.

� In the navigator, right-click the item node, then choose Cut.

� In the navigator, click the item node, then choose Cut from the Edit menu.

3. Save your work.

Using the Recipe Properties WindowThe Recipe Properties window displays information about the selected recipe.

�� To display the recipe properties window:1. In the navigator, select Material View.

2. There are two methods to display the Recipe Properties window:

� In the navigator, right-click the recipe node, then choose Properties.

� In the navigator, click the recipe, then choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

3. The following fields are display only:

� Status displays the status of the selected recipe.

� Recipe displays the code entered for the recipe.

� Version displays the recipe version.

� Description displays a brief description of the recipe.

� Formula displays the formula number for the recipe.

� Version displays the formula version.

� Description displays a brief description of the formula.

� Main Product displays the primary product for the formula associated withthe recipe.

� Main Product Qty displays the quantity and UOM of the first product theformula produces.

� Planned Loss displays the planned process loss for the recipe.

� Routing displays the routing number for the recipe.

� Version displays the routing version.

� Description displays a brief description of the routing.

6-48 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 285: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

4. Click OK to close the window.

Using the Process Instruction SheetThe Process Instruction Sheet pane is a view only user interface that displays on theright side of the Recipe Designer. It is a hierarchical grid that combines the details ofthe three main components of the recipe: routing steps, the formula items associatedto the steps, and the process instructions. The Process Instruction Sheet updatesautomatically, and instantaneously reflects any changes that you make.

Standard process instructions are defined at the routing step level and at theformula item level. These instructions are generic and apply to any recipes that usethe routing and the formula. These standard instructions are shown in the ProcessInstruction Sheet, but cannot be amended in the recipe.

The standard process instructions maintained at item level in the formula displayunder the item line. You can show or hide process instructions by expanding orcollapsing the corresponding item line. The process instructions defined at the stepand item association level for the selected recipe are displayed. The processinstructions defined at the recipe level appear with a yellow background todistinguish between standard instructions defined at the formula level, and thespecific instructions defined at the recipe level.

In order to define process instructions that are specific to a particular recipe, use theEdit Process Instruction window.

Process instructions are defined at two separate levels within a recipe:

� At the routing step level with instructions that need to be considered at aspecific stage in the process.

� At the routing step and item level with instructions that are specific to theprocessing of a specific item at a particular stage in the process.

�� To create or edit process instructions:1. There are two methods to display the Edit Process Instructions window:

� In the navigator, right-click the appropriate item line for a product,ingredient, byproduct, or routing step, then choose Edit ProcessInstructions.

� In the navigator, click the appropriate item line for a product, ingredient,byproduct, or routing step, then choose Edit Process Instructions from theTools menu.

Recipes 6-49

Page 286: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Recipe Designer

2. Enter or edit text.

3. Click OK.

4. Save your work.

�� To add text tokens to process instructions:1. There are two methods to display the Edit Process Instructions window:

� In the navigator, right-click the appropriate item line for a product,ingredient, byproduct, or routing step, then choose Edit ProcessInstructions.

� In the navigator, click the appropriate item line for a product, ingredient,byproduct, or routing step, then choose Edit Process Instructions from theTools menu.

2. Click Find. Select the appropriate text tokens.

3. Click OK. The full text for the text token displays in the Process Instructionswindow.

4. Save your work.

6-50 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 287: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

7

Tools

This topic presents multipurpose tools that help you manage recipes, formulas,routings, and operations. It includes a basic understanding of each tool. Severalcustomer requirements are stated for New Product Development tools and sometypical solutions are provided. A discussion of tools shows you how New ProductDevelopment enhances your ability to manage routine and advanced search andreplace operations. You are shown how to use the Graphical Process Navigator.

The following topics provide a basic understanding of tools:

� Understanding Search and Replace

� Requirements

� Solutions

� Performing a Search and Replace

� Using the Graphical Process Navigator

Tools 7-1

Page 288: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Search and Replace

Understanding Search and ReplaceThe New Product Development Search and Replace window enables you to searchfor and replace records in:

� Operations

� Routings

� Formulas

� Recipes

The Find list enables you to select the target for the search, such as an operation or arouting. You can only search for one target at a time. The Basic and Advancedsearch regions let you specify conditions to narrow the search. Once you haveselected a target, and initiated a search, clear the window before searching for anew target.

Using the Basic Search RegionThe Basic search region enables you to specify any combination of Name, Version,Description, Owner, or Status. Enter specific search data, or use the wildcard % forsearch string matching.

For example, if you search for:

Owner JDOE

Name A%

The results contain all entries where the Owner is JDOE and that start with theletter A.

Using the Advanced Search RegionThe Advanced search region enables you to specify conditions to narrow the searchfor one or more Item field entries. You can specify different conditions for eachsearch target.

Specifying the Item Field in an Advanced Search� For Operations you can specify search conditions for:

� Effective End Date

� Effective Start Date

� Inactive

7-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 289: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Search and Replace

� Operation

� Operation Class

� Operation Version

� Owner

� Resource

� Status

� For Routings you can specify search conditions for:

� Effective End Date

� Effective Start Date

� Inactive

� Operation

� Owner

� Routing

� Routing Class

� Routing Version

� Status

� For Formulas you can specify search conditions for:

� Byproduct

� Inactive

� Formula

� Formula Class

� Formula Version

� Ingredient

� Owner

� Product

� Status

� For Recipes you can specify search conditions for:

� Formula

Tools 7-3

Page 290: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Search and Replace

� Owner

� Owner Organization

� Recipe

� Routing

� Status

� Version

Specifying the Condition Field in an Advanced SearchIn an advanced search of operations, routings, formulas, or recipes, select any of thefollowing conditions for one or more Items entered:

� Equal To finds targets equal to the specified Value entered.

� Greater Than finds targets greater than the specified Value entered.

� Less Than finds targets less than the specified Value entered.

� Greater Than or Equal To finds targets greater than or equal to the specifiedValue entered.

� Less Than or Equal To finds targets less than or equal to the specified Valueentered.

� In finds targets that contain the information specified in single quotation marks.

For example, if you specify the Item as Owner, select the Condition In, andenter ’JDOE’ as the Value, you find all targets whose owners are JDOE. You canenter one or several Values for the search. You must separate each entry with acomma.

For example, if you specify the Item as Product, select the Condition In, andenter ’FORMULA 101’,’ROUTING 100’ you find each target product thatcontains the entries specified within single quotation marks.

� Not In finds targets that do not contain the information specified in singlequotation marks.

For example, if you specify the Item as Owner, select the Condition Not In, andenter ’JDOE’ as the Value, you find all targets whose owners are not JDOE. Youcan enter one or several Values for the search. You must separate each entrywith a comma.

7-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 291: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Understanding Search and Replace

For example, if you specify the Item as Product, select the Condition Not In,and enter ’FORMULA 101’,’ROUTING 100’ you find each target product thatdoes not contain entries specified within single quotation marks.

� Like finds targets similar to the the information specified using the wildcard %.

For example, if you specify the Item as Product, select the Condition Like, andenter FORM% you find each target Product that contains entries with the lettersFORM.

Mass Search and Replace SecurityYour System Administrator sets up the security level for Mass Search and Replace.This is done in the System Administrator responsibility using the ApplicationsFunctions window. When functions are registered for the appropriate responsibilitythat can use Mass Search and Replace two parameters are passed with the followingsettings:

� Enable_status=No disables the ability to make a change of status using MassSearch and Replace. If you cannot change status and you feel you should beable to, please contact your System Administrator.

� Enable_status=Yes is the default and enables the responsibility to make achange of status using Mass Search and Replace.

� Enable_replace=No disables the replace capability. If you cannot use the replacecapability, and you feel you should be able to, please contact your SystemAdministrator.

� Enable_replace=Yes is the default and enables the responsibility to use thereplace capability.

Tools 7-5

Page 292: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Requirements

RequirementsFollowing are some requirements that customers have for tools in New ProductDevelopment.

Can the application perform a mass search and replace for ingredientsin formulas?Yes. By using the New Product Development Search and Replace tool, theapplication searches for and replaces specified records in recipes, formulas,routings, and operations.

Does mass search and replace support change management control byallowing status and version updates?Yes. As part of change management control, mass search and replace enables rapidcomponent substitution while supporting status and version control updates foreach formula, recipe, routing, or operation affected by the substitution.

7-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 293: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Solutions

SolutionsNew Product Development provides solutions to help resolve issues at every stageof the product development process. The following represent some of the keymanagement solutions for tools.

New Product Development Search and Replace Provides Efficient Substitutions in Formulas,Routings, Operations, and Recipes The New Product Development Search and Replacewindow enables the identification and replacement of key components in formulas,routings, operations, and recipes for single or multiple organizations. The basicfeatures of the search and replace tool permit the query for fundamentalcomponents such as the name, version, description, owner, and status. Advancedsearch and replace features facilitate the search and replacement of componentsusing conditions and specific values in formulas, routings, operations, and recipes.

Mass Search and Replace Supports Change Management Control Formula ingredientsubstitution is a critical business need for process industries to meet stringentproduct specifications during batch production. The tool enables rapididentification and replacement of approved ingredient substitutions.

Ingredients are replaced for various business reasons such as obsolescence,customizations, pricing, or regulatory compliance. Mass Search and Replace takesinto account the affected formula and status in order to recalculate step quantities,technical parameters, and formula contribution by class and subclass. As part ofchange management control, this tool assists in the management of status andversion for each changed component.

Tools 7-7

Page 294: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Performing a Search and Replace

Performing a Search and ReplaceThe New Product Development Search and Replace window enables you to searchfor and replace components in recipes, formulas, operations, and routings.

Prerequisites� Determine if your responsibility has the authority to use the Search and Replace

function.

� Read the Understanding Search and Replace topic.

�� To search for and replace components:1. Navigate to the New Product Development Search and Replace window.

2. Select Operations, Routings, Formulas, or Recipes from the Find list to specifythe type of records you need to search and replace.

3. The Basic and Advanced regions let you specify the search criteria.

Enter one or more of the search parameters. It is not necessary to enter them all.You can use string search matching by entering % as wildcard.

Basic4. Enter the Name of the record type you need to search and replace.

5. Enter the Version number of the record type you need to search and replace.

6. Enter the Description of the record type you need to search and replace.

7. Select a Status of the record type you need to search and replace.

8. You have the option to:

� Click Find to search for all records that match the Basic search criteria. Ifyou do this, proceed to step 11.

� Click the Advanced region to enter additional search criteria. If you do this,proceed to step 9.

Advanced9. Enter an Item, Condition, and Value to specify a condition for the search. For

example, to search for all formulas with a version of 1, select Formula Versionas the Item, Equal To as the Condition, and enter a Value of 1.

7-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 295: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Performing a Search and Replace

10. Click Find to search for all records that match Basic and Advanced searchcriteria.

11. The Results of the search display. If no results are found, you not able to useGoTo or Replace. To review the details for each record found perform one ofthe following:

� Double-click the drill down indicator next to the appropriate Name.

� Select the appropriate Name and click Go To.

Return to the New Product Development Search and Replace window tocontinue.

Replace12. Click the Replace region.

13. Select the component to be replaced from the Replace list. Enter the Oldcomponent Name and, if required, the Version.

14. Enter the New component Name to replace in selected Results. If required,enter a new Version. If the component being replaced is a formula, enter anappropriate Scale Factor. You can replace ingredients using a scale factorgreater than zero. However, you cannot replace ingredients using a negativescale factor.

15. Select the Update check box next to each Name that you want to replace withthe entry made in the New Name field. To update the entire list, select SelectAll from the Actions menu. To clear all selections, select Deselect All from theActions menu.

16. Press Replace to perform the specified changes. The message "Are you sure youwant to replace this?" is displayed:

� Enter Y to indicate that you want to replace the selected records with theNew Name field.

� Enter N to indicate that you do not want to replace the selected recordswith the New Name field.

Note: You cannot use the Replace capability unless you haveproper authorization. Contact your System Administrator if youhave questions regarding this authorization.

Tools 7-9

Page 296: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Performing a Search and Replace

If automatic version control is not active, the message "Create new version?"displays.

� Enter Y to indicate that you want to create a new version.

� Enter N to indicate that you do not want to create a new version.

If no records are found that meet the replace criteria, the message "No recordswere found that meet the replace criteria." is displayed.

17. Note the Request ID number displayed.

18. Choose View from the menu, and choose Requests to view the status of yourrequest in the concurrent program manager.

19. When your Request ID has completed normally, select View Log to determineif there were any problems. The log displays all successful and failed updates.The log specifies if there were no records found for the replacement operation.

20. The Replace Results window displays.

Using the Replace Results WindowThe Replace Results window displays the records that have had somethingreplaced. It enables you to change the status of a Name to the Default Target Statusor to a Status you specify. Submit Status Change is not available if you changedStatus using the Replace function itself.

�� To change status to the Default Target Status:1. Search for and replace records as described in the Performing a Search and

Replace topic. All updated records have a check box next to them.

2. Click Default Target Status. The Default Target Status window displays.

3. Enter the appropriate Status for all records selected.

4. Click OK.

Note: You cannot change Status unless your have properauthorization. Contact your System Administrator if you havequestions regarding this authorization.

7-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 297: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Performing a Search and Replace

5. All selected records are updated to the Default Target Status.

6. To change the Status displayed for one or more records, select the appropriateStatus from the LOV, and select the Update check box.

7. Click Submit Status Change to save changes to the records selected forupdating.

8. Click Errors to determine if any errors occurred when the updated Status wasapplied to the database.

9. Click Close.

Note: The Status of a Name does not change to the Default TargetStatus if the Status is not valid for the selected Name.

Tools 7-11

Page 298: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Graphical Process Navigator

Using the Graphical Process NavigatorThe Graphical Process Navigator offers an alternative to operating the applicationfrom the Functions tabbed region of the Navigator, or from a Workbench. For moreinformation on use of the Graphical Process Navigator please refer to the OracleApplications User’s Guide.

�� To use the Graphical Process Navigator:1. Click the Processes tab on the Navigator - Formulator window or the

Navigator - Process Engineer window.

2. Click an icon to display its related process.

3. Double-click an icon to navigate to the window described in the Process columnof the following table.

Step Action Process

1. Create Item Displays the ItemMaster window

Using the OPM Inventory responsibility, definethe item and the default item attributes to beused throughout the Process Manufacturingapplication in order to record inventorytransactions.

2. Create Assays Displays theAssays window

Within the OPM Product Developmentresponsibility, define measurements to be takenfor items and lots. These measurements arecalled assays. They define all the attributes orcharacteristics you plan to measure and recordin quality control. For example, you canmeasure concentration, saturation,temperature, viscosity, color, or flavor. Assaysare used to help define quality controlspecifications.

3. Create Item /LocationSpecification

Displays theItem/LocationSpecificationswindow

Quality control specifications are defined for aparticular inventory item, lot, and sublot. Theyare used for a specific warehouse orwarehouses, or on an application-wide basis.One or more assays are required to define aspecification. Target values or ranges, dateranges, and preferences can be associated witheach assay.

7-12 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 299: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Graphical Process Navigator

4. Create Item /LocationSample

Displays theItem/LocationSample window

Use the Item/Location Sample window tosample a material directly from inventorywhen quality control testing is required.Specify the organization, warehouse, location,lot, sublot, quantity, UOM, and date eachsample was drawn.

5. Enter ResultsforItem/LocationSample

Displays theItem/LocationResults window.

Enter the results of quality control testsperformed for each assay of the materials yousampled. You can add additional assay tests atthis point if you performed additional qualitycontrol tests on the material other than thoseset up for the item on the specification.

6. Create aFormula

Displays theFormula Detailswindow

Double-click the icon to open the FormulaDetails window where you create a newFormula. Save the new Formula. ChooseChange Status from the Actions menu. Changethe formula Status to Approved for Lab Use orApproved for General Use, and save it.

7. Create aRouting

Displays theRouting Detailswindow

Double-click the icon to open the RoutingDetails window. Enter and save the Routing.Choose Change Status from the Actions menu.Change the Routing Status to Approved forLab Use or Approved for General Use, andsave it.

8. Create a Recipe Displays theRecipe Detailswindow

Double-click the icon to open the Recipe Detailswindow to create a new Recipe. Save the newRecipe. Choose Change Status from the ActionsMenu. Change the recipe Status to Approvedfor General Use and save it.

9. Create a RecipeValidity Rule

Displays theRecipe ValidityRules window

Before using a recipe for production, create arecipe validity rule for the recipe. Double clickthe icon to open the Recipe Validity Ruleswindow. Create and save a validity rule.Choose Change Status from the Actions menu.Change the validity rule Status to Approvedfor General Use, and save it.

Step Action Process

Tools 7-13

Page 300: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Using the Graphical Process Navigator

10. VerifyQuantities forIngredientItems

Displays theUnallocatedInventorySummary window

The Unallocated Inventory Summary windowlists nettable, allocated, and unallocatedquantities for the specified item and warehousecombination. Inventory availability is based onthe nettable indicators for Production, OrderProcessing, Shipping, and process Planningapplications. The only enterable fields are Item,Warehouse, and Nettable.

11. CreateProductionSpecification

Displays theProductionSpecificationswindow

Quality specifications are defined for aparticular batch, formula, and validity rule,routing, or operation. One or more assays arerequired to define a specification. You have theability to associate target values, specificationranges, date ranges and preferences to eachdefined assay.

12. Create a Batch Displays theBatches window

Choose either an item or a recipe that isApproved for Lab Use or Approved forGeneral Use as a basis for the batch. Select theappropriate Recipe Validity Rule if you areusing a Recipe. Assuming a Recipe is used, theproducts, ingredients, and their quantitiesdisplay automatically. Make appropriatechanges, and perform any required scaling.Sample the batch at any required stage of theproduction run.

13. Create aProductionSample

Displays theProductionSample window

Use the Production Sample window whensampling material created by a batch forquality control testing. Specify, at minimum,the batch document number or item fields. Youcan specify a formula, routing, or operationthat you want to sample. The quantity, UOM,and date each sample was drawn is alsorequired. Fields are provided to record thesource of the sample and the sample location.

14. Enter Resultsfor ProductionSample

Displays theProduction Resultswindow

Enter the result of quality control tests for eachassay of the materials you sampled from thebatch. Add additional assays at this point ifyou performed additional quality control testson the materials other than those set up for thebatch on the specification.

Step Action Process

7-14 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 301: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

New Product Development Navigator P

A

New Product Development Navigator Paths

Although your System Administrator may have customized your Navigator, typicalnavigation paths are described in the following tables. In some cases, there is morethan one way to navigate to a window. These tables provide the most typicaldefault path.

Window Path

Activities Process Engineer:Setup:Activities

Activity Properties Routing Designer navigator:right-click theactivity:choose Properties

Routing Designer navigator:click theactivity:choose Properties from the Viewmenu

Alternate Resources Process Engineer:Setup:AlternateResources

By-Product Properties Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:right-click the byproductnode:choose Properties

Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:click the byproduct node:chooseProperties from the View menu

Display Calculation Errors Formulator:Spreadsheet:LaboratorySpreadsheet:Actions:Calculation Errors

Find Analysis Formulator:FormulaAnalysis:Analysis:Formula IngredientContribution Analysis:View:Find...

Find Formulas (from the Navigator) Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:View:Find...

aths A-1

Page 302: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Find Formulas (from the View Menu) Formulator:Formulas:FormulaDetails:View:Find...

Find Operations (from the Navigator) Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operationtab:View:Find...

Find Operations (from the View Menu) Process Engineer:Operations:OperationDetails Activities:View:Find...

Find Recipe Organization Details Formulator:Recipes:Recipe Details:clickOrganization Details

Find Recipes (from the Navigator) Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Recipe tab:View:Find...

Find Recipes (from the View Menu) Process Engineer:Recipes:RecipeDetails:View:Find...

Find Routings (from the Navigator) Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Routingtab:View:Find...

Find Routings (from the View Menu) Process Engineer:Routings:RoutingDetails:View:Find...

Find Status Codes Formulator:Setup:StatusCodes:View:Find...

Formula Analysis Parameters Formulator:Formula Analysis:Parameters

Formula By-Product Lines Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:select aformula:Formula Header Summary:clickBy-Products

(also available from Formula By-ProductSummary and Formula Details)

Formula By-Product Line Edit Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula:select By-Products:FormulaBy-Product Summary:select a Line:clickEdit Line

(also available from Formula By-ProductLine Summary, Formula By-Product Lines,and Formula Details)

Window Path

A-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 303: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Formula By-Product Line Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:expand By-Products:selecta byproduct node

Formula By-Product Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula:select By-Products

Formula Classes Formulator:Setup:Formula Class

Formula Details Formulator:Formulas

(also available from Formulas SummaryBy... and Formula Header Summary)

Formula Header Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:select aformula node label

Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis Formulator:Formula Analysis:Analysis

Formula Ingredient Lines Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:select aformula:Formula Header Summary:clickIngredients

(also available from Formula IngredientSummary and Formula Details)

Formula Ingredient Line Edit Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:select Ingredients:FormulaIngredient Summary:select a Line:clickEdit Line

(also available from Formula IngredientLine Summary, Formula Ingredient Lines,and Formula Details)

Formula Ingredient Line Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:expand Ingredients:selectan ingredient node

Formula Ingredient Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:select Ingredients

Formula Inquiry Selection Formulator:Formula Inquiry

Window Path

New Product Development Navigator Paths A-3

Page 304: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Formula Inquiry Summary View Formulator:Formula Inquiry:FormulaInquiry Selection

Formula Product Line Edit Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:select Products:FormulaProduct Summary:select a Line:click EditLine

(also available from Formula Product LineSummary, Formula Product Lines, andFormula Details)

Formula Product Lines Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:select aformula node:Formula HeaderSummary:click Products

(also available from Formula ProductSummary)

Formula Product Line Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:expand Formulas:expanda formula node:expand Products:select aproduct node

Formula Product Summary Formulator:FormulatorWorkbench:expand Formulas:expand aformula node:select Products

Formula Summary By... Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Formula tab:choose View By:selectClass, Status, Owner, Laboratory, Product,or Plant:expand Formulas By...:select anunexpanded node

Formulator Workbench Formulator:Formulator Workbench

Indented Bill of Materials Report Formulator:Indented Formulas

Ingredient Properties Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:right-click the ingredientnode:choose Properties

Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:click the ingredient:chooseProperties from the View menu

Item Technical Data Formulator:Technical Data:Item TechnicalData

Window Path

A-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 305: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Item Technical Data Selection Formulator:Formulas:FormulaDetails:choose Technical Data Selectionfrom the Actions menu

Items Formulator:Inventory Items

Laboratory Spreadsheet Formulator:Spreadsheet

New Product Development Search andReplace

Formulator:Mass Search And Replace

Operation Activity Process Engineer:Operations:OperationDetails Activities:select an activity:clickResources

Operation Activity Line Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:choseView By Operations:expandOperations:select an operationnode:Operation Header Summary:clickDetails:Operation Details Activities:selectan activity

(also available from Operation ActivityLine Summary)

Operation Activity Line Summary Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:chooseView By Operation:expand Operations,expand an operation node:select anactivity

Operation Classes Process Engineer:Setup:Operation Classes

Operation Details Activities Process Engineer:Operations

(also available from Operation SummaryBy..., Operation Header Summary, andRouting Details)

Operation Details Activity-Resource Process Engineer:Operations:OperationDetails Activities:query an operation:selectan Activity:click Resources

Operation Header Summary Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:chooseView By Operation:expandOperations:select an operation node label

Window Path

New Product Development Navigator Paths A-5

Page 306: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Operation Resource Line Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:chooseView By Operation:expandOperations:select an operation:OperationHeader Summary:click Details

(also available from Operation DetailsActivity-Resource)

Operation Resource Line Summary Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:chooseView By Operation:expandOperations:expand an operationnode:expand an activity node:select aresource

Operations Summary By... Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Operation tab:chooseView By Class or Status:expandOperations By...:select unexpandedoperation node

Plant Resources Process Engineer:Setup:Plant Resources

Product Development Workbench Process Engineer:Engineering Workbench

Product Properties Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:right-click the productnode:choose Properties

Recipe Designer Material View navigator:click the product:choose Properties fromthe View menu

Recipe Designer Formulator:Recipes:query the desiredrecipe:click Designer

(also available from Recipe Summary andRecipe Header Summary)

Recipe Details Process Engineer:Recipes

Formulator:Recipes

(also available from Recipe HeaderSummary and Recipes Summary By...)

Recipe Header Summary Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Recipe tab:choose View ByRecipe:expand Recipes:select a recipe nodelabel

Window Path

A-6 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 307: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Recipe Organization Details Formulator:Recipe Orgn Details:FindRecipe Organization Details:enter searchparameters:click Find

(also available from Recipe Details)

Recipe Properties Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:right-click the recipenode:choose Properties

Recipe Designer Material Viewnavigator:click the recipe:chooseProperties from the View menu

Recipe Step/Material Association Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Recipe tab:choose View ByRecipe:select a recipe:Recipe HeaderSummary:click Details:Recipe Details:clickStep/Material Association

Recipe Validity Rules Formulator:Recipes:query a recipe on theRecipe Details window:click Validity Rules

Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Recipe tab:choose View ByRecipe:expand Recipes:select a recipenode:Recipe Header Summary:clickValidity Rules tab:select desired validityrule:click Details

(also available from Recipe HeaderSummary)

Recipes Summary By... Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Recipe tab:choose View By Status orOwner:expand Recipes By...:selectunexpanded node

Resource Properties Routing Designer navigator:right-clickresource:choose Properties

Routing Designer navigator:click theresource:choose Properties from the Viewmenu

Resources Process Engineer:Setup:Generic Resources

Retrieve Spreadsheet Formulator:Spreadsheet:LaboratorySpreadsheet:choose Retrieve Spreadsheetfrom Actions menu

Routing Classes Process Engineer:Setup:Routing Classes

Window Path

New Product Development Navigator Paths A-7

Page 308: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Routing Designer Process Engineer:Routings:query thedesired routing:click Designer

(also available from Routing Summary andRouting Header Summary)

Routing Details Process Engineer:Routings

(also available from Routings SummaryBy... and Routing Header Summary)

Routing Header Summary Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Routing tab:chooseView By Routing:expand Routings:select arouting node label

Routing Properties Routing Designer navigator:right-click therouting:choose Properties

Routing Designer navigator:click therouting:choose Properties from the Viewmenu.

Routing Step Dependencies Process Engineer:Routings:RoutingDetails:query a routing:select a Step:clickStep Dependencies

Routing Step Dependency Properties Routing Designer:displays automaticallyafter drawing connection between twosteps

Routing Designer:double-click the lineconnecting two steps

Routing Designer right pane:right-click theline connecting two steps:chooseProperties

Routing Step Line Process Engineer:Routings:RoutingDetails:query a routing:select a Step

(also available from Routing Step LineSummary)

Routing Step Line Summary Process Engineer:EngineeringWorkbench:click the Routing tab:selectView By Routing:expand Routings:expanda routing node:select an operation node

Window Path

A-8 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 309: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Routing Step Properties Routing Designer navigator:right-click therouting step:choose Properties

Routing Designer navigator:click therouting step:choose Properties from theView menu

Routing Designer routing graphpane:double-click the routing step

Routings Summary By... Formulator:Formulator Workbench:clickthe Routing tab:choose View By Class,Status, or Owner:expand RoutingsBy...:select an unexpanded node

Save Spreadsheet Formulator:Spreadsheet:LaboratorySpreadsheet:select Retrieve Spreadsheetfrom Actions menu:make appropriatechanges:choose Save Spreadsheet fromActions menu

Status Codes Formulator:Setup:Status Codes

Status Details Formulator:Setup:Status Codes:clickDetails

Technical Parameter Sequences Formulator:Technical Data:TechnicalParameter Sequences

Technical Parameters Formulator:Technical Data:TechnicalParameters

Formulator:Formulas:FormulaDetails:query the formula:selectIngredients region:select Line containingtechnical parameters:select IngredientTechnical Parameters from Actions menu

Theoretical Process Loss Process Engineer:Process Loss

(also available from Routing HeaderSummary and Routing Classes, wherevalues can be edited)

Validity Rule Summary By Product Formulator:Validity Rules - Product

Validity Rule Summary By Recipe Formulator:Validity Rules - Recipe

Window Path

New Product Development Navigator Paths A-9

Page 310: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

A-10 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 311: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

New Product Development Profile Op

B

New Product Development Profile Options

During your implementation, you set a value for selected profile options to specifyhow your New Product Development application controls access to and processesdata. New Product Development uses the listed profile options.

� GMD: Byproduct Active

� GMD: Default Consumption/Yield Type

� GMD: Default Step Release Type

� GMD: Default Lab Organization

� GMD: Density

� GMD: Display Specifications

� GMD: Effective Maximum Date

� GMD: Effective Minimum Date

� GMD: Exact Specification Match

� GMD: Formula Version Control

� GMD: Operation Version Control

� GMD: Process Instruction Paragraph

� GMD: QC Grade

� GMD: Recipe Version Control

� GMD: Routing Version Control

� GMD: Scrap Factor Type

� GMD: UOM Mass Type

tions B-1

Page 312: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� GMD: UOM Volume Type

� GMD: User Name for ALL

� GMD: Workflow Timeout (in Days)

� GMD: Yield Type

You can set up these profile options when you set up other applications prior toyour New Product Development implementation. Refer to the other product user'sguides for more details on how these products use these profile options.

Your System Administrator sets user profile options at one or more of the followinglevels: Site, Application, Responsibility, and User. Use the Personal Profile Optionswindow to view or set your profile options at the user level. You can consult theOracle Process Manufacturing Implementation Guide for a complete description of theprofile options listed. Consult your Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guidefor a list of profile options common to all Oracle Applications.

B-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 313: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

New Product Development Status C

C

New Product Development Status Codes

This appendix outlines how status codes change when workflow is and is notrunning.

Workflow Running and Approval Required for the Current DataA status of New changes to a status of:

� Pending Approval for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

� Pending Approval for General Use when the Requester selects Approve forGeneral Use.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Pending Approval for Laboratory Use changes to a status of:

� Approved for Laboratory Use when the Approver approves the request.

� Revise for Laboratory Use when the Approver rejects the request.

A status of Revise for Laboratory Use changes to a status of:

� Pending Approval for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

A status of Approved for Laboratory Use changes to a status of:

� Pending Approval for General Use when the Requester selects Approve forGeneral Use.

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Pending Approval for General Use changes to a status of:

odes C-1

Page 314: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� Approved for General Use when the Approver approves the request.

� Revise for General Use when the Approver rejects the request.

A status of Revise for General Use changes to a status of:

� Pending Approval for General Use when the Requester selects Approve forGeneral Use.

A status of Approved for General Use changes to a status of:

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Frozen when the Requester selects Frozen.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of On Hold changes to a status of:

� Pending Approval for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

� Revise for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Revise for LaboratoryUse.

� Revise for General Use when the Requester selects Revise for General Use.

� Pending Approval for General Use when the Requester selects Approve forGeneral Use.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Frozen changes to a status of:

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Obsolete or Archived changes to a status of:

� Revise for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Revise for LaboratoryUse.

� Revise for General Use when the Requester selects Revise for General Use.

Workflow Not RunningA status of New changes to a status of:

� Approve for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

C-2 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 315: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

� Approve for General Use when the Requester selects Approve for General Use.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Approved for Laboratory Use changes to a status of:

� Approve for General Use when the Requester selects Approve for General Use.

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Approved for General Use changes to a status of:

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Frozen when the Requester selects Frozen.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of On Hold changes to a status of:

� Approve for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

� Approve for General Use when the Requester selects Approve for General Use.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Frozen changes to a status of:

� On Hold when the Requester selects On Hold.

� Obsolete or Archived when the Requester selects Obsolete or Archived.

A status of Obsolete or Archived changes to a status of:

� Approve for Laboratory Use when the Requester selects Approve forLaboratory Use.

� Approve for General Use when the Requester selects Approve for General Use.

New Product Development Status Codes C-3

Page 316: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

C-4 Oracle Process Manufacturing New Product Development User’s Guide

Page 317: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Glossary

Activity

Action performed during the manufacturing process, such as mixing or heating.

Activity Factor

The number of times an activity is performed. For example, a quality test must beperformed at the beginning, middle, and end of a mixing time period. Rather thandefining the activity and associated resources three times, use a factor or multiplierto indicate several iterations of the same activity. In example of performing a test atthe beginning, middle, and end of a mixing time period, you would define a factorof 3. Factors are applied to resource usage when planning and calculating resourcecosts. Factors can be set to zero to exclude a particular activity. This is also a meansto select the equipment (resources) that are used for this production run within thisspecific plant.

Boolean

A logical combinatorial system that represents the symbolic relationships betweenentities. Typical logical operators are: AND, OR, and NOT. In Boolean searching,the AND operator between two words indicates a search for both words. Forexample "pear AND apple" searches for information containing both words.

Byproduct

An item produced by a formula in addition to the product. Byproducts differ fromproducts in that you do not plan your production to make byproducts. Byproductscan have monetary value, but generally have less monetary value than products. Insome instances there can be a cost associated with disposing of a byproduct.

Glossary-1

Page 318: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Category

Code used to group items with similar characteristics, such as plastics, paints, inks,or foods.

Category Set

Grouping scheme consisting of categories. Typical category sets include purchasing,materials, costing, and planning.

Charges

Often in a process manufacturing plant the capacity of a step is determined by theequipment used. For example, a mixing tank that has a maximum capacity of 1000gallons overflows if more is added. A charge is defined as one full load that can beaccommodated in a single pass through equipment. The maximum capacitydetermines the total number of charges that are required to process the ingredientsrequired for a batch. In the previous example, a batch size of 5000 gallons requiresfive charges at 1000 gallons each.

Component Class

A way of classifying item costs. Examples of component classes are labor oroverhead.

Coproduct

One of several products produced by a formula. The term coproduct is sometimesused when a formula produces more than one product. OPM does not distinguishbetween products and coproducts. Compare with byproduct.

Cost Analysis Code

A code that generally specifies whether an activity is value-added.

Density

The quantity of a material per unit volume. In general, density is mass divided byvolume.

Exponentiation

The act or process of raising a quantity to a power.

Formula

A statement of ingredient requirements. A formula can also include processinginstructions and ingredient sequencing directions. The formula can also specify thequantities of each item.

Glossary-2

Page 319: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Gravimetric

Of or relating to measurement by weight.

Ingredient

An item that is used in a formula to produce a product.

Operation

A combination of one or more activities and the resources used to perform thoseactivities. For example, the combination of mixing (activity) and the mixer(resource) defines the mixing operation.

Process Parameter

A processing instruction. Processing parameters are used to provide operators withinformation needed for managing equipment that is used during the preparation ofa product or to drive a production decision, such as the type of filter to use, or thequantity of product required to fill a container. There is no direct linkage between aprocess parameter and the equipment it describes.

Product

An item that is produced by a formula. See also coproduct.

Project

In the context of product development, this represents an endeavor undertaken todevelop a new product or to perform changes to an existing product. A projectgathers information about the project manager, participants and objectives to bemet such as start dates, end dates, unit cost, and quality specifications.

Recipe

An entity that contains the minimum set of information that uniquely defines themanufacturing requirements for a specific product. Recipes provide a way todescribe products and how those products are produced.

Resource

Any noninventory item used in production, like a mixer or oven.

Routing

A sequenced set of operations that need to be performed in order to complete aproduction batch.

Glossary-3

Page 320: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Routing Process Loss

The capability to account for material lost during the production process at therouting level. This loss can vary depending on the routing and quantity beingprocessed by the routing. A loss factor is defined at the routing level based on arange of quantities.

Scaling

The proportional increase or decrease of product, byproduct, and ingredientquantities in a formula or batch.

Specific Gravity

The ratio of the density of a substance to the density of some other substance,usually pure water, taken as a standard when both densities are obtained byweighing in air at standard temperature and pressure.

Specification

Identify the target or ideal result of a quality control assay test performed on anitem or lot. Assay codes and item attributes are combined to devise testspecifications for specific items and lots.

Technical Class

An item category that is used to identify and group ingredients. It is used toanalyze ingredients within a formula by contribution of the class. This can assist inboth development and maintenance of a formula, wherein the overall contributionof specific technical characteristics of ingredients is significant.

Technical Subclass

An item category that is used to identify and group ingredients within a technicalclass. The technical subclass refines the analysis of ingredients within a formula alevel beyond the technical class. For example, if a technical class is RESIN, atechnical subclass could be EPOXY.

Theoretical Process Loss

The capability to account for the material lost during the production process at therouting level. This loss can vary depending on the routing or the individualquantity being processed by the routing. This loss is defined at the routing level andis based on a minimum and maximum range of quantities.

Glossary-4

Page 321: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Theoretical Yield Calculation

A calculation that calculates product quantities yielded by a formula given aspecified yield percentage.

Validity Rule

Formerly effectivity. The combination of a quantity of material and an effective datethat is used by production, planning, costing, or MSDS in one or more specifiedorganizations.

Version

A number identifying a variant of a formula, operation, routing, or recipe.

Glossary-5

Page 322: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Glossary-6

Page 323: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Index

Aactivities, 1-8, 1-16, 2-11Activities window, 2-11Activity Code, 2-11activity factor, 4-3, 4-4, 4-12activity node, 1-13Activity Properties window, 5-31Analysis Code, 2-11analysis, tasks, 1-5API, 1-16, 3-6Applications Programming Interfaces, 3-6approver, setting up, 1-16ASQC, 6-7, 6-34assay

global, 2-16quality, 2-16

attributes, routing, 6-7audit trail, 1-27Automatic Step Quantity Calculation, 6-7, 6-34average material throughput, 5-4

Bbatch, 4-4

production, 4-2steps in, 4-2

business process workflow, 1-16business rules, 1-16byproduct node, 1-13By-Product Properties window, 6-44

Ccalculating step quantities, 6-7calculation errors

in spreadsheet, 3-14capacity

step, 4-4capacity, maximum, 4-3changeovers, allowance for, 5-5charge, 4-3, 4-4, 4-17circular reference, 5-28class node, 1-13class, viewing by, 1-11classes, technical, 3-87, 3-96components

interface, 1-10menu and toolbar, 1-10

conditions, specifying in search and replace, 7-4conversion

mass to volume, 2-16units of measure setup, 2-3volume to mass, 2-16

copying objects, 1-12cost analysis codes, 1-7, 2-4, 2-11cost calendar, 1-7, 2-4Cost Management application, 2-4costing prerequisites, 2-4create formulas, 3-3

DData Organizer, 1-10, 1-11data type, 2-16

Boolean, 2-17

Index-1

Page 324: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

character, 2-17cost, 2-18equivalent weight, 2-18expression, 2-17numeric, 2-17quantity per unit, 2-18specific gravity, 2-18validation list, 2-17volume%, 2-17weight%, 2-17

decision trees, 1-16default routing, 5-4density, requirement for spreadsheet, 2-16density, role in unit of measure conversions, 2-15detail view, 1-10display, hierarchical, 1-10drag-and-drop function, 5-24

Eelectronic mail, 1-16equivalent weight, 2-16errors

unit of measure conversion, 3-8evaporation, allowance for, 5-5expressions, 2-13

fixed, 2-14in technical parameters, 2-13

FFinancials data, 2-4Find Analysis window, 3-95Find Formulas window, 3-33Find list, in search and replace, 7-2Find Operations window, 4-9Find Recipes window, 6-9Find Routings window, 5-8fixed expressions, 2-14formula, 1-11

classes, 2-8creating, 3-29definition, 3-3grouping, 2-8ingredient substitution, 7-7

packaging, 3-4properties, 2-8setup, 3-3

Formula Analysis Parameters window, 3-87Formula By-Product Line Edit window, 3-65Formula By-Product Line Summary window, 3-62Formula By-Product Lines window, 3-63Formula By-Product Summary window, 3-52formula classes, 1-7, 3-34, 3-36, 3-38Formula Classes window, 2-8Formula Details window, 2-8, 3-38Formula Header Summary window, 3-36Formula Ingredient Contribution Analysis

window, 3-89Formula Ingredient Line Edit window, 3-72Formula Ingredient Lines window, 3-69Formula Ingredient Summary window, 3-53Formula Inquiry Selection window, 3-79Formula Inquiry Summary window, 3-82Formula Item pane, 6-37Formula Management, 1-4formula node, 1-13formula phantoms, 3-18Formula Product Line Edit window, 3-60Formula Product Line Summary window, 3-55,

3-67Formula Product Lines window, 3-57Formula Product Summary window, 3-50formula rollup, 2-14Formula Summary window, 3-34formula tab, 1-13formula version, 3-38formula weight, 2-15Formulator, 1-5, 1-7, 2-6Formulator Responsibility, 1-29

GGeneral Text paragraph, 6-42global assays, 2-16GMD

Byproduct Active, 2-2Default Consumption/Yield Type, 2-2Default Lab Organization, 2-2Default Step Release Type, 2-2

Index-2

Page 325: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Density, 2-2, 2-16Display Specifications, 2-2Effective Maximum Date, 2-2Effective Minimum Date, 2-2Exact Specification Match, 2-2Formula Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Operation Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Process Instruction Paragraph, 2-2, 2-3, 6-39,

6-40, 6-42QC Grade, 2-2Recipe Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Routing Version Control, 1-27Scrap Factor Type, 2-2UOM Mass Type, 2-2UOM Volume Type, 2-2User Name for ALL, 2-2Workflow Timeout (in Days), 2-2Yield Type, 2-2, 3-21

GMECopy Formula Text profile option, 3-16

Hhierarchical display, 1-10hierarchy, technical parameters, 2-13

Iicon, 1-10Indented Bill of Materials Report, 3-74Indented Formulas Report box, 3-74ingredient node, 1-13Ingredient Properties window, 6-43ingredient usage, 1-4ingredient usage, at step level, 5-5ingredients, scaling, 3-20interface components, 1-10intermediates, 3-18Inventory Control application, 2-4Inventory Control, prerequisites, 2-4ISO 9000, 3-7item lot and sublot conversions, 1-7Item Technical Data window, 3-8Item/Lot Sublot Conversions window, 2-4items, setup, 1-7

Llaboratories, 1-8laboratory approval, related to status, 1-16Laboratory Management, 1-4Laboratory Spreadsheet window, 2-12, 3-11laboratory types, setup, 2-12language support, 6-10life cycle, product, 1-4loss, in standard costing, 5-4loss, planned, 6-22Lot/Sublot Std Conversion window, 2-16

MMass Search and Replace security, 1-7material requirements, 6-36Material Safety Data Sheet, 1-14material throughput, average, 5-4material viscosity, allowance for, 5-5mathematical operators, in expressions, 2-15maximum capacity, 4-3menu, 1-10migration scripts, 3-4MLS, 6-10MSDS, 1-14multibatch management, 3-18multilingual support, 3-4, 6-10

Nnavigator pane, 6-37navigator style, 5-24navigator tree, 1-10navigator view, 6-40node

activity, 1-13byproduct, 1-13class, 1-13formula, 1-13ingredient, 1-13operation, 1-13owner, 1-13product, 1-13recipe, 1-13resource, 1-13

Index-3

Page 326: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

routing, 1-13status, 1-13

nodes, 1-13Notification Summary window, 1-16notification, in workflow, 1-16

Ooperation, 1-11Operation Activity Line Summary window, 4-20Operation Activity window, 4-17operation classes, 1-8, 2-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-12Operation Classes window, 2-9Operation Details Activities window, 4-12Operation Header Summary window, 4-11operation node, 1-13Operation Resource Line Summary window, 4-22Operation Resource Line window, 4-25operation tab, 1-13operations, 1-8Operations Summary By... window, 4-10operations, grouping, 2-9OPM System Administration

prerequisites, 2-2Oracle Applications, 1-16Organizations window, 2-12owner, 1-11owner node, 1-13

Ppackaging formula, 3-4Personal folder, 1-11Personal Shortcuts, 1-14

copying objects to, 1-12pasting objects to, 1-12

phantom typeautomatic generation, 3-18manual generation, 3-18

phantoms, 3-18planned process loss, 6-22plant resources, 1-8plant type, 2-12preference, for validity rule usage, 6-23, 6-27, 6-29prerequisite setup, 1-2

prerequisitescosting, 2-4OPM System Administration, 2-2

prerequisites, setup, 1-7Process Engineer, 1-6, 1-7, 2-6, 5-4Process Engineer Workbench, 2-6Process Instruction Sheet, 6-42, 6-49process instructions, 6-36process loss

planned, 6-22theoretical, 6-22

process requirements, 6-36process speeds and feeds, 5-5Product Development Security Manager, 1-7Product Development Security Profile

Manager, 1-7product node, 1-13Product Properties window, 6-44product requirements, 1-5production batch, 4-2production loss factor, 5-5profile option

GMDProcess Instruction Paragraph, 2-2

profile options, 1-7, 2-2GMD

Byproduct Active, 2-2Default Consumption/Yield Type, 2-2Default Lab Organization, 2-2Default Step Release Type, 2-2Density, 2-2Display Specifications, 2-2Effective Maximum Date, 2-2Effective Minimum Date, 2-2Exact Specification Match, 2-2Formula Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Operation Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Process Instruction Paragraph, 2-2QC Grade, 2-2Recipe Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Routing Version Control, 1-27, 2-2Scrap Factor Type, 2-2UOM Mass Type, 2-2UOM Volume Type, 2-2User Name for ALL, 2-2

Index-4

Page 327: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Workflow Timeout (in Days), 2-2Yield Type, 2-2

profile options, required setup, 2-2profile values, version control, 1-27Public folder, 1-11Public Shortcuts, 1-14

Qquality control assay, 2-16quantity per unit, 2-15

Rrecipe, 1-11Recipe Designer, 5-24, 6-40Recipe Details window, 6-7, 6-15, 6-40Recipe Header Summary window, 6-7, 6-11, 6-40recipe node, 1-13Recipe Organization Details window, 6-7, 6-22Recipe Properties window, 6-48Recipe Step/Material Association window, 6-8,

6-34Recipe Summary By... window, 6-7, 6-40recipe tab, 1-13Recipe Validity Rules Lines window, 6-8, 6-28Recipe Validity Rules Multi-Record window, 6-26Recipe Validity Rules window, 6-8, 6-26recipes, 1-8Recipes Summary By... window, 6-10Recipes Summary window, 6-10regulatory compliance, 1-4regulatory information, displaying, 3-47, 3-58,

3-61, 3-64, 3-66, 3-71, 3-73, 6-20regulatory information, editing, 3-46, 3-58, 3-60,

3-64, 3-65, 3-70, 3-73, 6-19replace

formulas, 7-2operations, 7-2recipes, 7-2routings, 7-2

Replace Results window, 7-10requirements, Automatic Step Quantity

Calculation, 6-34requirements, product, 1-5

resource costs, and activity factor, 4-4resource node, 1-13Resource Properties window, 5-32resource requirements, 4-2resources, 1-8Responsibilities, 1-7, 2-6responsibility, workbench, 2-6right mouse click menu, 1-12routing, 1-11routing classes, 1-8, 2-10, 5-9, 5-11, 5-13, 5-17, 5-18

creating, 2-10setting up, 2-10

Routing Classes window, 2-10Routing Designer window, 5-26Routing Details window, 5-13, 5-24, 5-26Routing Header Summary window, 5-11, 5-26routing node, 1-13Routing Properties window, 5-28routing step

automatic calculation, 6-7overriding, 6-7

routing step dependencies, 5-19Routing Step Dependencies window, 5-19Routing Step Dependency Properties

window, 5-28, 5-33Routing Step Line Summary window, 5-17Routing Step Line window, 5-18Routing Step Properties window, 5-29Routing Summary window, 5-9, 5-26routing tab, 1-13routings, 1-8rules, business, 1-16

Sscaling factor, 3-20search and replace

advanced search region, 7-2basic search region, 7-2

Search and Replace window, 7-2security

Mass Search and Replace, 1-7seed data, 1-17setting up

formulas, 3-3

Index-5

Page 328: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

setuplaboratory types, 2-12prerequisites, 1-7profile options, 2-2technical classes, 3-87, 3-96technical subclasses, 3-87, 3-96units of measure, 2-3units of measure classes, 2-3units of measure conversion, 2-3

setup, prerequisite, 1-2spreadsheet

calculation errors, 3-15general description, 3-11updating the laboratory formula, 3-15

spreadsheet calculations, 2-16Standard Operating Procedures, linking to

process, 3-5Status Approval Workflow, 1-7, 1-16, 3-4

disabling, 1-21enabling, 1-18

Status Approval Workflow, understanding, 1-18status codes, 1-18status node, 1-13Status, view by, 1-11step capacity, 4-4step dependency, 5-24Step Dependency properties, 5-33step quantities, automatic calculation of, 5-4step quantity, automatic calculation, 6-7steps, 4-2Submit Status Change, in search and replace, 7-10System Administration, 1-7, 2-12System Administration application, 1-17system security profile, 1-3

Ttab

formula, 1-13operation, 1-13recipe, 1-13routing, 1-13

tabs, 1-13task analysis, 1-5technical characteristics, 3-4

technical classes, 3-79, 3-87, 3-96Technical Data Selection window, 3-96technical parameter sequences, 1-8Technical Parameter Sequences window, 2-19technical parameter type

cost, 2-15equivalent weight, 2-15specific gravity, 2-15volume Percent, 2-15weight percent, 2-15

technical parameters, 1-8, 3-4data entry, 3-8density, 2-19, 3-8explanation, 2-13expressions, 2-13formula rollups, 2-14sequence, 2-19

Technical Parameters window, 2-15, 2-16technical parameters, hierarchy, 2-13test batches, 1-4text

adding to a formula, 3-16text associations, 6-42theoretical process loss, 2-10, 6-22Theoretical Process Loss Edit window, 5-23Theoretical Process Loss window, 5-22theoretical process loss, as a cost, 5-4toolbar, 1-10tools, designer, 5-26translation and MLS, 6-10translations, 3-4tree

data organizer, 1-11triggers, 1-17

Uunit of measure conversion error, 3-8UOM conversions, 1-7

Vvalidity rule, 5-4, 5-5Validity Rules Summary by Product, 6-30Validity Rules Summary by Recipe, 6-32

Index-6

Page 329: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

version control, 1-27, 3-6Version Control, setup, 1-7version, formula, 3-38View by

class, 1-11owner, 1-11status, 1-11

Wwildcard, use in search and replace, 7-2, 7-5, 7-8window

Activity Properties, 5-31By-Product Properties, 6-44Ingredient Properties, 6-43Operation

Activity Line Summary, 4-7Resource Line Summary, 4-8

Operation Activity Line, 4-7Operation Details

Activities, 4-5, 4-7Operation Resource Line, 4-8Operations Header Summary, 4-5Operations Summary By..., 4-5, 4-10Product Properties, 6-44Recipe Designer, 6-40Recipe Properties, 6-48Resource Properties, 5-32Routing Designer, 5-26, 6-36Routing Details, 5-6, 5-10, 5-13Routing Header Summary, 5-6, 5-11Routing Properties, 5-28Routing Step Dependencies, 5-7, 5-20Routing Step Dependency Properties, 5-28Routing Step Line Summary, 5-7, 5-17Routing Step Properties, 5-29Routings Summary, 5-9Routings Summary By..., 5-6Step Dependency Properties, 5-33Theoretical Process Loss, 5-7, 5-22

work breakdown structure, 1-5, 1-7work method design, and Activities, 2-11workbench, 1-4, 1-14, 1-28

Formulator, 2-6Process Engineer, 5-4

workbench responsibility, 2-6workflow

basics, 1-16business processes, 1-16electronic notifications, 1-16setup, 1-17steps, 1-16

Workflow Activity Approval ConfigurationFramework window, 1-17

Workflow Activity Configuration window, 1-17Workflow Process Activation window, 1-17Workflow Process Configuration Framework

window, 1-17Workflow Process Configuration window, 1-17workflow, and seed data, 1-17

Index-7

Page 330: Oracle Process Manufacturing · 2002-08-07 · Adding and Editing Status Codes ... The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Process Manufacturing ... 4

Index-8